Home

Novell Suse Linux Professional 9.2

1. 21 23 The setuid Bit 2 22 21 24 Thesetgid Bit a 4 cogno E Redon 2125 The Sticky Bit i iso m o RR xe ER ERA 21 26 Access Control Lists o o 213 Important Linux Commands ooo o 21 3 1 FileCommands ens 21 3 2 System Commands llle 214 The vi Editor 22 Ergonomics in the Workplace 221 The Working Environment llle 22 11 The Right DESK jc ea eee ee RR wa aoe date ol aie 22 1 2 Sitting Correctly on the Right Working Chair 22 1 8 Good Lighting for Productive Work 22 14 Optimum Climate o oo ooo 0008 22 1 5 Noise Levels 22 2 Office Equipment 2221 BuyingaScren ele 22 2 2 Screen Location 00 000 eee ee eee 22 2 3 The Keyboard and the WristS 22 24 The Mouse 22 3 Links and Literature A Help and Documentation B SUSE LINUX FAQ SUSE LINUX 281 282 282 283 284 285 286 287 287 288 289 290 291 293 297 XV Welcome Congratulations for selecting SUSE LINUX A few clicks are all that is needed to prepare the installation which takes fifteen to twenty minutes After configur ing the users and their passwords and selecting the screen resolution your SUSE LINUX system is ready for use If you are familiar with earlier versions of SUSE LINUX you will notice how much the configuration with the system
2. ssssuesn REGION mi dl exporting public keys file encryption ooooocccooccccco generating a key pair importing keys oooooooccoooo key Servers cerciorarse exporting keys oooooooooo importing a key signing k ys i cesses eere reed text encryption sesser sionis snes esis trusting keys oooooocccoooocooo TAM E a E nada ES SET EE Kinternet apii nae naine ENEA RRN KAE EMail EESE uns address book ooooooocccooooo attachments 000005 configuring isses decrypting messages encrypting messages mul os coil o ale alent folders caro iii sGnuPG apta ia ii identities eee crees message status 08 SERGE unera evade ausa marianne signing messages spam filtering oooooooooooo oo writing messages qp X Konqueror bookmarks 2er eere ee digital cameras ssuu file manager suus image galleries sL A kiheosese Pee wisi Ai eaten keywords 2 006 c cece cece eee saving web pages web browser ss Kooka sscestese ee eee meta character recognition configuring sss gallery soria 231 A PIEVIEW 2lereiieiev eg dua beer mee SCAnning cerea p ve eene KOrganizer iis eee address book oooooocococooooo 196 attendees 0 0 cece c
3. 006 27011278 paths iaa 260 PIPES scere Ie bye aa asserere 262 Wild cards one ern sates i261 shortcuts advantages of ooocooccccccoccnnoo 291 sound MR EEEE bureau et alsamixer qamix NoteEdit players ooccococccccccccccononos amatoK epet evo RUIT 181 XMMS ertet rene me e 184 WorkManh aiveresrridbveeteerR ans 185 Spam xeresccesertriwweru rv aer dde ue aea 143 O etate entia onerosa es 1299 Midi ta aii 278 SuSEWatcher 0 ccc cece cence ences system rebooting 6 cece eee eee ees 278 shutdown sees 278 system messages 6 cece ee eee eee eee 299 T tar oh dicta dia eder Rr eate mie ais 263 273 nr A rrara ENERE 277 299 TOP sscecsetecievek ees te a es eek ia 276 TV Ru 2 p 210 PERG Sernebspeery nete d ada eese 211 un macia aaa 2081210 RXlVepg eseia es ee Rh menta 211 teletext reirei peii bada eap nini 1210 U umounl je rhe n RE e tet phe En inns 275 updatedb i orcepype eere tare 274 USB digital cameras sss 222 V Vi 278 virtual consoles n vipgatng weeiixlenessbers eee 256 W web browsers GalOON siii irc 11141114 Konqueror eerror inmid eei 1084110 iMozilla daros ores 115 web pages A 109 webcams A ee tends 212 MOV 2 li a 210 wild cards on eese irrita 274 X XMMS Joss ade ee ur eth feng ee nore da 184
4. 129 11 4 For More Information 131 6d5 uli UOLOAJOUY 124 11 1 Key Management This section covers operations needed for handling your digital key ring Other programs such as your mail program KMail or Evolution access the managed key data to process signed or encrypted contents 11 1 1 Generating a New Key Pair To be able to exchange encrypted messages with other users first generate your own key pair One part of it the public key is distributed to your commu nication partners who can use it to encrypt the files or e mail messages they send The other part of the key pair the private key is used to decrypt the en crypted contents Note Private Key versus Public Key The public key is intended for the public and is distributed to all of your communication partners However only you should have access to the private key Do not grant other users access to this data Note Start KGpg from the main menu by selecting Internet gt Security or enter kgpg on the command line When you start the program for the first time an as sistant appears to guide you through the configuration Follow the instructions up to the point where you are prompted to create a key Enter a name an e mail address and optionally a comment If you do not like the default settings pro vided also set the expiration time for the key the key size and the encryption algorithm used
5. 124 ER E a eee a AA 126 112 The Key Server Dialog bai a ng RR pes 127 TC 127 C 128 T Pv 129 11 3 Encrypting and Decrypting the Clipboard 129 11 3 2 Encrypting and Decrypting by Dragging and Dropping 129 XR ERU ER pe Yeu du e ess 130 AE 131 viii Contents 12 KMail The KDE Mail Application 133 121 KMailandKontact llle 134 122 Mail Formats es 134 A is eee ae 134 124 Configuring KMail o ooo o 135 1241 Defining Your User Identity 135 TT 136 12 43 Configuring the Appearance of KMaill 136 125 Using KMail eass e osse o ye oem eR one eene e die 137 a eek Be era O 138 ee habe te et ee tee LC eR oe 139 12 8 Importing Mail sss 645266484 Sie eee eta E RE 141 129 TheAddressBook llle 141 1210 Filters oo criar RR RQ UAE SUR UU m UE S 141 1210 1 Filter Rules lll 142 Sd ho be Xue S Gas O 142 uc Sus oe Me de ds ba ae eee ee V 143 m 145 A O 145 146 AA DID 146 a AAA E gardes 146 TC 146 et bh ede he GHG Ae eng ee don deca 147 149 VU tad oe e Be Boe aa Me Rees Aad edu RUE 150 150 is yd a sei 151 13 5 1 Surmmiaty ks oi A Ege e moms 151 Tv 152 SUSE LINUX 13 3 8 Calendar 13 3 4 Tasks 13 35 Contacts 134 FE Mail T cT 1342 Mail Preferences llle E Rad AA oo es UR ee ee we RE 13 4 5 Folders 13 4 6 Filters
6. Figure 15 11 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard 15 9 2 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard If you do not have an external MIDI keyboard connected to your sound card use the virtual keyboard vkeybd For this purpose the internal port numbers listed with pmidi 1 as described above are important To start the program from the command line enter vkeybd addr 73 0 amp The port address must be adapted to your system Specify the first WaveTable port from the list If an ex ternal sound generator is connected alternatively specify the port number of the external MIDI port vkeybd supports a number of additional options For example enter vkeybd addr 73 0 octave 5 amp toincrease the number of displayed octaves to five An overview of the command line options can be accessed with vkeybd helpor in vkeybd The instrument designation in the preset list can be configured by specifying a preset file with the preset option Extract the instrument names of a sound font file with the command sftovkb Change to the respective directory with cd usr share sounds sf2 and enter the command sftovkb Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2 gt vintage vkb to save the names in your home SUSE LINUX _______ 195 196 directory in vintage vkb The vkeybd interface can be configured with the view menu The mapping of the keys to the sent MIDI notes is saved in the file vkeybdrc Additional specifications can be made in this file To i
7. If your messages are stored in the mbox format run the following command sa learn mbox spam Mail spam directory 12 10 Filters SpamAssassin returns the following message upon a successful spam recognition event Learned from 15 message s To learn more about this tool visit the site http www spamassassin org or read the corresponding man page 12 11 Encrypting Mail with PGP or GnuPG KMail allows you to encrypt outgoing e mail messages To encrypt your e mail first generate a key pair as described in Encryption with KGpg on page 123 KMail then needs to be restarted to be able to use the encryption features To configure the details of the encryption procedure select Settings gt Config ure KMail Security gt Crypto plugins When you are finished with these settings select Identities to specify the identity under which to send encrypted and signed messages Then use Modify to open a window in which to enter your OpenPGP key After confirming with OK the key should be displayed in the corresponding field Close the configuration dialog with Ok The public key must be made available to recipients of a signed message so they can verify its authenticity Other users must have your public key to send en crypted messages to you the owner of the key 12 11 1 Signing Messages Create your messages as usual Before sending the message select Options
8. o lle 42 O oe Goins fe Gord 42 21 3 The Panel s aae s o m RR ERR eR 43 T 43 2 15 Handling Floppy Disks CDs or DVDs 43 D2 Settings uec he este km RR UE RA e EP RR eS 44 22 Keyboatd ss sek RR RR RETIA E 44 22 2 Mouse Configuration 2 eee eee 45 2 233 Menus and Toolbars 2200 45 2 24 Screensaver a ee 45 220 Windows us ci m cay Bak ee oe X e feed 46 226 Background l l nne 46 227 FONG we e eR eR UR EE UR oes 47 228 Themel ocio cas ceu oo ese eR a ved 47 Contents 229 Accessibility s s e trota eki o iE EA 47 m 49 2 2 11 Sound systemalerts o o 49 23 File Management with Nautilus lees 49 23 1 Navigating in Nautilus o 49 232 FileManagement lle 50 23 3 Configuring Nautilus lees 51 24 Important Utilities oe poke o Ep a a E i G 51 241 DICHONATY e e eom a eo gen 51 52 55 57 cia dae a da 58 9 2 Getting HlelOl xo eme o ee ober onem rao eate te ede enata 59 3 3 Managing the Transition from Microsoft Office 60 3 3 1 From MS Word to OpenOffice org Write 60 3 3 2 From MS Excel to OpenOffice org Calc 61 3 3 3 From MS PowerPoint to OpenOffice org Impress 61 3 4 Changing the Global Settings lt o o 61 3 5 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer
9. Default Key Server To make your public key available to a wide audience ex port it to one of the key servers on the Internet For more information refer to The Key Server Dialog on page SUSE LINUX 6d2 um uoudAI1ou3 125 126 File Edit View Keys Groups Settings Help XK UV Say Name v Email Trust Expiration Size EE S Tux Pinguin tux example com Unlimited 1024 EIGamal subkey EX Unlimited 1024 j Qa Tux Pinguin tux example com 2 Unlimited RN Tux Pinguin tux example com Unlimited ON O Figure 11 2 KGpg The Key Manager File If you prefer to distribute your key as a file on a data medium instead of sending it by e mail click this option confirm or change the file path and name and click OK 11 1 3 Importing Keys If you receive a key in a file for example as an e mail attachment integrate it in your key ring with Import Key and use it for encrypted communication with the sender The procedure is similar to the procedure for exporting keys already described Signing Keys Keys can be signed like every other file to guarantee their authenticity and in tegrity If you are absolutely sure an imported key belongs to the individual spec ified as the owner express your trust in the authenticity of the key with your sig nature Note Encrypted communication is only secure to the extent that you can positively associate public keys in circulation with the sp
10. 12 1 1 6 The Main Menu Open the main menu by clicking the icon to the far left of the panel Alternatively press APF The main menu is subdivided into these sections Recently Used Applications or Most Used Applications All Applications a menu with all applications sorted according to categories and Actions The following section provides information about a number of actions that can be triggered from the main menu Detailed information about the Control Center is available in Settings on the next page Bookmarks By selecting Edit Bookmarks from this menu start an editor in which to organize your bookmarks If you select one of the bookmarks present in the menu the Konqueror browser starts and loads the corre sponding URL Run Command This item opens a dialog where you can enter a command You can use it to quickly start an application whose command you know without having to navigate through the program submenus Start New Session To start a second session with a graphical user interface on your machine select Start New Session from the main menu Your current session remains active while you are taken to the login screen Log in You can also start another window manager Access the first session by pressing APF Press instead of F7 to access the new session Additional sessions can be accessed by pressing Ct AI F9 to F12 Lock Screen If you leave y
11. 63 3 5 1 Creating Texts with the AutoPilot 63 3 52 Creating Texts without the AutoPilot 64 5 5 9 Selecting Text es eade RE ee ae bee ded A 64 3 5 4 Working with theStylist cles 65 355 InsertingaTable ees 67 3 5 6 Inserting Graphics eee 68 3 6 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 68 a ds da ek o 69 SUSE LINUX vi 4 5 3 6 2 A Practical Example Monthly Expenses 3 68 Creating Charts 2 2 0 0 0 0 00000002 eee 3 6 4 Importing Spreadsheet Tables 3 7 Creating Graphics Using OpenOffice org Draw 3 8 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress 3 8 Creating Presentations with the AutoPilot 382 AddingaSlide oo e The KWrite Text Editor E A We a abe Ah ae Se Baek oe ees es TIPP 43 TheEditMenu llle A EUR UA RE I Ui De ic eae es ice o Es 45 TheBookmarksMenu l llle Leda aa as edo bad A eee ee EE 48 TheHelpMenu llle 49 Kate AA ncs ded Synchronizing a Handheld Computer with KPilot 51 How KPilot Worksl ene 52 Conduits Used by KPilot o o o oo ooo ooo 5 22 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit 5 23 Managing To Do Items and Events 53 Working with KPilotl ooo ooo oo o 5 3 1 Backing up Data from the Handheld
12. Editorial Rating Format rl Reset Digital _Guide for Your PC vi emes movies Th Encryption series or Live Repeat p kids Program index Subtitles any shows Networks A news search Feature class pocial bee ms to d fko ees Ere 1 Time zo Gnefkom repeat hobbies cea Meu ees ou can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of music e Version 2 as published by the Free Sofware Cu Add filter shortcut tributed in the hope that it will be useful but without any adult Update filter shortcut details Reset Acquisition is waiting for reception forced passive Figure 16 2 The Electronic TV Magazine nxtvepg Show networks The Filter menu offers plenty of filter functions Right click the program list to open a special filter menu in which to activate contextual filter functions Of particular interest is the Navigate menu This is built directly from the EPG data It will appear in the language provided by the network 165 Webcam Operation with gqcam gqcam is a webcam application that assists in taking snapshots or automatic pic ture series with webcams To use gqcam your webcam must be supported by Video4Linux Many USB webcams like the Logitech Quickcam Express are au tomatically recognized Grayscale and color cameras can be used TV cards that support Video4Linux can also be used as an image source An overview of the supported USB dev
13. Figure 10 1 The Initial Browser Window When you right click in the document window Mozilla opens a context menu with a number of entries Use this menu for example to add the current page to your bookmarks Bookmark This Page or to view its source code View Page Source 10 1 The Initial Bowser Window 10 1 1 The Menu Bar The menu bar includes the following menus File This menu provides the common entries to open save and print files or web pages It also allows you to send an entire web page or only the link to a page as an e mail Selecting Edit Page loads the current page into the Mozilla Composer which allows you to edit web pages and to create your own from scratch Mozilla s online help documents include an introduc tion to creating web pages which you may want to read as a primer on the topic The File menu also includes the Work Offline item which tells the browser to use only locally stored or cached web pages Edit Edit includes the common editing operations such as Undo Cut Copy Paste and Delete There is also an item to search for words or text strings in web pages Find Previous repeats the previous search action Preferences opens a dialog in which to change the browser s configuration options The details of this are described in Preferences on page View The View menu includes items to display or hide the different elements
14. Save Project As This generates an XML file with the extension aup which describes the project The actual audio data is saved in a directory named after the project with data ap pended The entire project or the currently selected segment can also be exported as a stereo WAV file To export the project in MP3 format refer to the information in Compressing Audio Datajon the next page 15 7 Direct Recording and Playback of WAV Files arecord and aplay from the kalsatools package provide a simple and flex ible interface to the PCM devices arecord and aplay can be used to record and play audio data in the WAV format among other formats The command arecord d 10 f cd t wav mysong wav records a WAV file of ten sec onds in CD quality 16 bit 44 1 kHz List all options of arecord and aplay by running them with the he1p option qaRecord is a simple recording program with a graphical interface and level display As this program makes use of an internal buffer of about 1 MB config urable with buffersize it enables uninterrupted recordings even on slow hardware especially if it is run with real time priority for more information SUSE LINUX xnur ui PUNOS 191 192 see Buffering and Latenciesjon page 186 During the recording the currently used buffer size is displayed in the status line under Buffer and the maximum buffer size required so far for this recording is displayed under Peak File Abo
15. 13 4 6 Filters Evolution offers a number of options for filtering e mail Filters can be used to move a message into a specific folder or to delete a message Messages can also be moved directly to the trash with a filter There are two options for creating a new filter creating a filter from scratch or creating a filter based on a message to filter The latter is extremely useful for filtering messages sent to a mailing list Setting up a Filter Select Tools gt Filters This dialog lists your existing filters which can be edited or deleted Click Add to create a new filter Enter a name for the new filter in Rule Name Select the criteria to use for the fil ter Options include sender recipients source account subject date and status The drop box showing Contains provides a variety of options such as contains is and is not Select the appropriate condition Enter the text for which to search Click Add criterion to add more filter criteria Use Execute actions to deter mine if all or only some of the criteria must be met to apply the filter In the lower part of the window determine the action to take when the filter cri teria are met Messages can for example be moved or copied to a folder or as signed a special color When moving or copying select the destination folder by clicking In the folder list that appears select the folder Use New to create a new folder Click
16. 7 2 Creating a New Contact o o 100 7 3 Creating Address Lists 101 7 4 Searching Address Data 102 75 Importing and Exporting Address Data 103 7 6 For More Information 103 xoogsseJpp vy ULIM JUSUIBDUDIA SSOIPPY 100 7 Starting the Program KAdaressBook can be started independently from the main menu from the ap pointment scheduler KOrganizer or the mail program KMail On start up the KDE Address Book window consists of three frames as shown in Figure 7 1 The top frame contains the menu and toolbars The two lower frames contain the cur rent list of contacts and the address data of the currently selected contact File Edit View Tools Settings Help LA i e 8 E dh x Search Al Fields w Filter None Given Name Family Name Email Address Tux Pinguin tuxGexample com Tux Pinguin Willy Wilber a Home 098 Email Homepage http w Home Postfach 99999 Auf der Scholle 12345 Gr nland Antarktis Figure 7 1 KAddressBook Main Window 7 2 Creating a New Contact Open the contact editor with File gt New Contact CrN or by clicking on the respective icon in the toolbar See Figure 2 on the facing page Enter all important information including name title private and business ad dresses all phone numbers e mail addresses and URLs under the General tab
17. GsusE A y orbit tux public html Novell Fonts sxw Welcome txt x E E o z v a 8 tems 2 Files 7 2 KB Total 6 Folders Figure 1 3 The File Manager Konqueror 1 3 Konqueror as a File Manager 1 3 1 The Konqueror Menu Location Using Location open additional Konqueror windows If you click New Window your home directory is displayed in a new window Dupli cate Window produces a second window with the same content You can also send a file or a link using the browser function by e mail If you click one of these menu items the KMail composer opens Specify the recipient and compose a text Depending on the selected item the file is already at tached or the link is displayed in the e mail body You can also print directly from this menu Edit Most items under Edit only become active if you select an object in the main window Apart from the standard editing functions like cutting copy ing pasting renaming moving to the trash and deleting there is also the Create New item which can be used to create directories files and de vices Another item in the Edit menu lets you view and change the prop erties of files and directories and their permissions With it grant or deny the owner a group or all users read write and execute permissions In the main window select one or several files by moving the mouse pointer over them while keeping the left mouse button
18. If desired assign the contact to a category that can later be used for filtering the address view Select a standard category Family Friend Business Customer or School or create a new category 7 1 Starting the Program General Details Misc M Home Edit Name Tux Penguine B J Work Role s Mobile Organization Formatted name Tux Penguine Edi Phone Numen Home Email tux example com UN a d L Edit Email Addresses J URL Edit Addresses J e Mo Select Categories Public vw ok j Apply 2 Cancel Figure 7 2 Entering New Contact Information The Details tab allows you to enter some useful extra information such as birth days anniversaries and job related data and offers the possibility to add com ments for this contact Under the Misc tab you can add a picture or logo to the selected contact and specify the longitude and latitude of the contact s location 7 3 Creating Address Lists To merge a number of contacts from your address database into a list you can create a distribution list To do so select Settings gt Toolbars gt Distribution Lists In the editor that opens select New List to create a new list Then drag and drop all desired contact entries from the overview in the upper part into the editor s list See Figure 7 3Jon the next page SUSE LINUX xXoogsseJpp v ULIM JUS
19. SUSE LINUX USER GUIDE 10 Edition 2004 Copyright O This publication is intellectual property of Novell Inc Its contents can be duplicated either in part or in whole provided that a copyright label is visibly located on each copy All information found in this book has been compiled with utmost attention to detail However this does not guarantee complete accuracy Neither SuSE Linux GmbH the authors nor the translators shall be held liable for possible errors or the consequences thereof Many of the software and hardware descriptions cited in this book are registered trade marks All trade names are subject to copyright restrictions and may be registered trade marks SUSE LINUX GmbH essentially adheres to the manufacturer s spelling Names of products and trademarks appearing in this book with or without specific notation are likewise subject to trademark and trade protection laws and may thus fall under copyright restrictions Please direct suggestions and comments to documentation suse de Authors J rg Bartsch Gernot Hillier Marcel Hilzinger Johannes Meixner Matthias Nagorny Siegfried Olschner Marcus Sch fer Jens Daniel Schmidt Arvin Schnell Christian Schuszter Adrian Schr ter Rebecca Walter Translators Daniel Pisano Tino Tanner Editors J rg Arndt Antje Faber Karl Eichwalder Berthold Gunreben Roland Haidl Jana Jaeger Edith Parzefall In s Pozo Thomas R lz Thomas Schraitle Rebecca Walter Layo
20. Settings gt Summary Prefer ences to configure the information displayed SUSE LINUX WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD PUD ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 151 152 13 3 2 Inbox In this view the upper half of the window shows the contents of the folder In box The lower half is a preview pane used to display the selected mail message Disable the preview pane with View gt Preview Pane To change the folder displayed click the down arrow next to Inbox and select another folder from the list Use the search bar to search the messages in a folder If desired click a table header for the message list to sort the messages by that header The sort can be either ascending or descending as shown by the arrow to the right Click the header until the correct direction is displayed 1333 Calendar The initial display shows a day view of the current day with the month and a task list shown in an additional pane to the right Week work week and month views are also available from the toolbar or the View menu Use the search bar to find an entered appointment Add appointments and tasks using the buttons in the toolbar Also use the toolbar to page through the calendar or jump to a spe cific date 13 3 4 Tasks Tasks provides a list of tasks Use the toolbar to add tasks Search the tasks with the search bar 13 3 5 Contacts This view shows all the addresses in your address book To locate a particular ad dress
21. Video menu or at the command line with nxtvepg 16 4 1 Importing the EPG Database To set up and update the program database via the EPG signal set the tuner of your TV card to a station that broadcasts EPG This can be done using a TV ap plication such as motv or nxtvepg Only one application at a time can access the tuner If you set an EPG broadcaster in motv nxtvepg immediately begins importing the current list of TV programs The progress will be displayed If you have not started a TV application let nxtvepg search for EPG broadcast ers To do this use Configure gt Provider scan Use xatv is activated by de fault This indicates that nxtvepg is accessing the broadcasters saved in this file Note If there are problems check to see if the proper video source has been chosen under TV card input Note Select from the EPG providers found in Configure gt Select Provider Config ure gt Merge Providers even creates flexible associations between the various provider databases 16 4 2 Sorting the Programs nxtvepg provides a convenient filter function for managing even the most ex tensive program offerings Activate a network selection list with Configure SUSE LINUX UJO2Qq9M PUD Opol O9plA Al 211 212 Contro Configure Filter Navigate Help mosas EI o Title Network 3 Features r Tune TV Parental Rating Sound 7
22. like JPEG or jpeg After completing the selection and configuration exit the dialog The archive cre ated is available for further processing at the desired location To decompress an archive load it to File Roller click Edit gt Extract to and specify the target di rectory SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 53 Part Il Office Applications The OpenOffice org Office Suite OpenOffice org is a powerful Linux office suite that offers tools for all types of office tasks such as writing texts working with spreadsheets or creating graph ics and presentations With OpenOffice org use the same data across different computing platforms You can also open and edit files in Microsoft Office formats then save them back to this format if needed This chapter only covers the basic skills needed to get started with OpenOffice org 3 1 The OpenOffice org Quickstarter 58 56 2 Getting Help sian ak m ees os 59 3 3 Managing the Transition from Microsoft Office 60 PAS woe Ge wade eS aed 61 3 5 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer 63 3 6 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 68 3 7 Creating Graphics Using OpenOffice org Draw 73 3 8 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress 74 SLINS eoyo 810 eoyouedo syl 58 OpenOffice org consists of several application modules subprograms which are designed to interact with each other They are l
23. vide some information How can I defragment my hard disk Linux has an intelligent file system This file system makes defragmentation superfluous because it prevents fragmentation Make sure that you do not use more than ninety percent of each partition Use df h to view informa tion about used and available hard disk space 24 What is meant by partitioning Partitioning is dividing the hard disk into smaller sections For the default configuration SUSE LINUX requires at least two partitions one for Linux itself and one swap partition for the virtual main memory 25 How much space do I need for Linux This depends on how many and which packages you want to install A standard installation with office applications requires about 1 GB 2 GB is recommended if you want space for your own data as well To install just about everything you need 3 6 GB depending on the version 26 I need more space for Linux How can I add another hard disk To make more space available integrate a new hard disk or parts of it par titions into your Linux system at any time For example if it turns out that you need more space in opt mount an additional hard disk partition to this directory To do so follow this procedure a Install your hard disk following the instructions of the manufacturer then start Linux b Log in as the root user c Partition the new hard disk with disk For further information refer to the manual pa
24. 13 4 7 Virtual Folders 135 Calendar 135 1 Adding Appointments o o o e 13 5 2 Scheduling a Meeting o oo e 13 5 3 Adding Tasks 13 6 Contacts 13 61 AddingContacts me s ardei ee 13 6 2 Making a List 18 63 Sharing Contacts 6 llle 13 7 Public Address Books in Evolution 13 8 For More Information 14 ISDN Telecommunication 141 Configuration 1413 Configuring Fax Services 0 ee ee eee 14 12 Configuring the Answering Machine 142 Usage 1421 General Notes about Reception 14 22 Fax Operation 14 23 Operation of the Answering Machine Contents IV Multimedia 173 175 tes o Aa IET T EE 176 15 22 Mixers s cs omen y yo x a ew ae ee cR 176 Ma eu UR Se a Ux fadam und we Gr AURA fest C LR aos 177 De GARD a a SEES Ee ho dd de 177 TP Tr TP 178 1524 The GNOME Mixer Applet 178 15 2 5 alsamixei 4 m o ER REGE REESE 178 152 7 The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 179 E 181 sS AW RARA ARA A e a S 181 E E ke Bae qug foot tbe e doo 181 15 3 2 XMMS i066 6 865 rom mg UE EGRE eod x Roy ym dor eo 184 hae Moe Bay heat ah bee A Bones 185 be MA eae a Rs 185 15 3 5 GNOME CD Player Applet 185 ee Poe e eode dote odo de 186 155 TheJACK Audio Connection Kit sn 187 15 6 Hard Disk Recording with A
25. 3 Where can I get more information about SUSE LINUX Most of the information about the installation and features of SUSE LINUX is provided in the manuals Documentation for applications is available in usr share doc packages and the HowTos are located in usr share doc howto en Read these files with a command like less usr share doc howto en DOS to Linux HOWTO txt gz Terminate the command by pressing 298 4 10 How can I enter commands in KDE Click the screen with shell icon in the panel to start the Bash shell Select alternative terminals from the main menu To run a single command press F2 then enter the command I cannot find many programs in KDE You can start all programs from a terminal window by entering the pro gram name and pressing Enter What is a mirror Why should I not get these things from ftp suse com As there are many users who need to retrieve things from the server at the same time its capacity limit would be reached very quickly For this reason there are a number of other FTP servers that contain a duplicate of the SUSE server These servers are referred to as mirrors Select a mirror in your vicin ity same country to speed up the download A list of mirror is available at http www suse de en support download ftp I cannot find any exe files Where are all the applications In Linux executable files normally do not have file extensions Most pro gram
26. After opening the directory kde share apps korganizer select a file that can be used as a calendar file by KOrganizer In our example this is the file palm ics In the case of a user called tux the complete path and file name would be home tux kde share apps korganizer palm ics as shown in Figure 5 3Jon the next page KOrganizer should not be running when data is being exchanged with the hand held Otherwise KPilot fails to carry out the sync operation SUSE LINUX JOlldx ULM anduon pjeupupH o Burziuoiu2uAS 87 88 ToDo File Conflict Resolution About Calendar file home tux kde share apps korganiz er palm ics Browse Sync Action East sync if possible Always do a full sync may take some time Sync only Pilot items to PC next sync only C Sync only PC items to Pilot next sync only Sync archived entries to the PC XL Cancel j Figure 5 3 Dialog Showing the Path to a KOrganizer Calendar File 5 3 Working with KPilot Synchronizing the data of KDE applications with those of the handheld computer is quite easy Simply start KPilot then press the HotSync button on the cradle to initiate the sync operation 5 3 1 Backing up Data from the Handheld To do a full backup select File gt Backup The backup is performed during the next sync operation After that switch back by selecting File gt HotSync from the menu Otherwise
27. Copy or Cut Overwrite Mode Ins This changes the program s input mode By default KWrite inserts new text at the current cursor position Selecting this menu item switches the editing mode so any existing text is overwritten Find CHF Find Next F3 Find Previous Ghiff F3 Replace CHAR In the dialog that opens enter a search string or a regular expression and define the search direction the starting point and other details To go from one match of the search term to the next select Find Next To go to a previous match of the search term select Find Previous To replace a search term with another string use Replace Go to Line CDC To jump to a particular line in the document select this menu item enter the line number in the dialog that opens then confirm with OK 4 3 The Edit Menu 4 4 The View Menu From this menu change several aspects of the text display in KWrite Enable or disable the editor s word wrap feature and toggle the display of line numbers F1D Also decide whether to display the icon border F6 to see or hide the bookmarks Finally the menu has an item to set the encoding of the text docu ment 4 5 The Bookmarks Menu In KWrite bookmarks are references to specific positions in the document They can be used to navigate quickly to a given line which is especially useful with longer documents To use bookmarks
28. Create to start the action By default Kon queror creates a file named index html It can be opened with Konqueror and presents you with a well arranged thumbnail index of your image collection To view an image in full size simply click the corresponding thumbnail 1 4 2 KInternet Connecting to the Internet To surf the Internet or send and receive e mail messages connect a modem or an ISDN or ethernet card to your machine and configure it This can be done with the help of the system assistant YaST As soon as the respective device has been configured correctly control the Internet dial up with KInternet On start up KDE loads KInternet The program checks whether an Internet connection can be established If this is possible the application icon a plug automatically appears in the right part of the KDE panel The following is an overview of the icons and their meanings Currently there is no connection to the Internet 1 4 Important Utilities The connection is just being established or terminated The connection has been established Data is transmitted to or from the Internet ENN An error has occurred If a connection has already been configured with YaST use View Log to identify the reason for the error The menu can be accessed by right clicking the KInternet icon doptseq Jay eut The connection is not yet active but will be established as soon as a request is made Right click KInte
29. Figure 3 3 The OpenOffice org AutoPilot 3 5 2 Creating Texts without the AutoPilot Create a new text document by selecting File gt New gt Text Document When editing a text document a second toolbar called the object bar is avail able just below the standard function bar Move the mouse pointer over an icon to get a short help text Documents can also be formatted with the Stylist which is described in Working with the Stylist on the facing page 3 5 3 Selecting Text To select text click the desired beginning of the selection and keeping the mouse button pressed move the cursor towards the end of the range which can be char acters lines or entire paragraphs Release the button when all desired text is se lected While selected text is displayed in inverted colors Open a context menu by right clicking the selection Use the context menu to change the font the font style and other text properties The Navigator displays information about the contents of a document It also en ables you to jump quickly to the different elements included For example use the Navigator to get a quick overview of all the chapters or to see a list of the im ages included in the document FigureB 4 on the next page shows the Navigator in action The elements listed in the Navigator vary according to the document loaded in Writer Open the Navigator by selecting Edit Navigator 3 5 Word Processing with OpenO
30. If the desktop should appear garbled in some way use this menu item to redraw it Configure Desktop This menu item starts a configuration dialog with which to configure the appearance and behavior of the desktop Details about the configuration of the desktop are provided in SettingsJon page 13 Start New Session This menu opens a dialog box asking if you want to start a new user environment After clicking Start New Session the current ses sion disappears into the background and the system switches to a new lo gin screen Each session has a function key assigned to it F7 represents the first session the second one and so on To switch between different ses sions press CHHARHER where is the function key corresponding to the desired session Lock Screen If you leave your workstation and do not log out you should use this function to prevent others from gaining access to your files Depending on the setting the screen turns blank or starts displaying a screensaver To continue using the computer enter your password SUSE LINUX doptseq Jay eut Logout Log out of your system if you are not going to use the system for some time 1 1 2 The Trash Bin The trash bin is a directory for files marked for deletion Drag icons from the file manager or the desktop to the trash bin icon by keeping the left mouse button pressed then release to drop them there Alternatively right click an icon and se lect
31. It allows you to enter the details about a program acting upon the background for exam ple to change it at certain intervals Fonts All fonts and font attributes used on the desktop can be configured here Click Choose then specify your settings in the dialog that opens By default an tialiasing is activated for all fonts To deactivate or customize antialiasing select the respective check boxes SUSE LINUX doptseq Jay eut 17 Note Changes to the antialiasing settings are only applied to newly started programs Programs already open are not affected by the changes Note zj Style Here select the style for all widgets elements of the graphical interface in KDE applications The configuration contains three tabs Select the style under Style and refer to the preview in the lower part of the window Use Effects to config ure various GUI effects and transparency types if supported by the respective style 1 25 Regional amp Accessibility Country Region amp Language The settings in this module only apply to KDE applications Other applications such as OpenOffice org may need to be configured separately All regional sys tem settings can be configured under five tabs Locale Select the desired country from the list Settings such as the language numbers currency time and date are automatically set to suitable values A preview of all current regional settings is displayed in the lowe
32. Move to Trash from the menu Click the trash bin icon to view its contents You can retrieve an item from the trash if desired Files removed with Delete are not kept in the trash bin but permanently deleted right away To permanently delete the files in the trash bin itself right click the trash bin icon and select Empty Trash Bin 1 1 3 CD ROM DVD ROM and Floppy Disks If you click the floppy disk icon when a floppy disk is inserted the file man ager starts and displays the content of the floppy disk Display a context menu with various options by right clicking the individual icons on the floppy disk Itis also possible to move the icon to a different location such as the desktop or your home directory by simply keeping the left mouse button pressed over it and dragging it to the destination You will be asked whether you want to move or copy the file or create a link The same technique can be used to copy or move files from your home directory to the floppy disk Right click the floppy disk icon to access the context menu Unmount is a very important option Be sure to unmount the drive before removing a floppy disk from the drive because this is necessary to trigger the actual writing of the data to the floppy disk The handling of CDs and DVDs is similar with the only difference that these me dia are not writable Despite this you must unmount CD and DVD drives be cause otherwise you will not be able to remove th
33. Options gt Offline Mode The transfers should start at the specified times Settings In Settings gt Configure KGet set preferences for the connection determine directories for specific file extensions and specify other settings 1 4 Important Utilities 1 4 4 SuSEWatcher SuSEWatcher is a program that is integrated in the system tray of the panel It checks for new updates and new hardware To be able to find any new updates it requires an online connection The program SuSEWatcher is included in the package kdebase3 SuSE The status of SuSEWatcher is displayed in the panel by icons in different colors When you click the icon in the panel a window opens informing you about the status of your online updates and the availability of any new updates You can also launch the check manually by clicking Check for updates Start the online update by selecting Start online update and entering the root password The YaST Online Update window is displayed 1 4 5 The Clipboard Klipper The KDE program Klipper serves as a clipboard for selected text normally marked by keeping the left mouse button pressed This text can be transferred to another application by moving the mouse pointer to the target location then pressing the middle mouse button on a two button mouse press both buttons simultaneously The text is copied to the selected location from the clipboard By default Klipper is started whe
34. Replying to or for warding a message opens the same message editor Next to From select from which account to send the message In the recipient fields enter an e mail ad dress or part of a name or address in your address book If Evolution can match what you enter to something in the address book a selection list is displayed Click the desired contact or complete your input if none match To select directly from the address book click To or CC Evolution can send e mail as plain text or HTML To format HTML mail select Format in the toolbar To send attachments select Attach or Insert gt Attach ment To send your message click Send If not ready to send it immediately make an other selection under File For example save the message as a draft or send it later SUSE LINUX WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD PUD ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 153 154 13 4 4 Encrypted E Mail and Signatures Evolution supports e mail encryption with PGP It can sign e mail and check signed e mail messages To use these features generate and manage keys with an external application such as gpg or KGpg To sign an e mail message before sending it select Security gt PGP sign When you click Send a dialog prompts for the password of your secret key Enter the password and exit the dialog with OK to send the signed e mail To sign other e mail messages in the course of this session wi
35. Sign message or the corresponding toolbar button The message is now ready to be sent To sign a message KMail must know your PGP or GnuPG password However if you have already provided the password KMail signs the message without requesting any further information Check whether a message has actu ally been signed by looking into the sent mail folder or the outbox if you did not use Send Now The corresponding message should be explicitly marked as having been signed SUSE LINUX uoupoliddy ION Idy eur ION 145 146 12 11 2 Checking the Signature of a Received Message If KMail is able to verify the signature of an e mail a green frame with the key ID is displayed If the signature cannot be verified a yellow frame with an alert is displayed This means that you do not have a suitable public key for the signa ture 12 11 3 Sending Public Keys Create a message for the person who should receive your public key Then select Attach gt Attach Public Key The mail can now be sent There is no guarantee that the recipient of a signed message receives the correct key It is possible for the mail to be intercepted on the way to the recipient and signed with another key Therefore the recipient should check the attached key by comparing the fin ger print with a previously received value Further information about this can be found in the PGP and GnuPG documentation 12 11 4 Decrypting Messages In KMai
36. Under Window Behavior configure the behavior of the windows and their activation For example set the focus to follow the mouse In this case you do not need to click a window to activate it The taskbar in the panel displays the applications currently started on your sys tem In this module determine to what extent started programs and virtual desk tops should be displayed in the taskbar and which actions should be associated with mouse clicks in the taskbar Under Panels set the position and size of the panels and configure their hiding mode You can also place additional menus in the panel If the standard num ber of virtual desktops is not sufficient set up additional virtual desktops under Multiple Desktops and assign them names SUSE LINUX doptseq Jay eut 15 1 2 3 Sound amp Multimedia Here perform all settings for the playback of audio CDs and for the sound sys tem Under System Bell switch from system notification to a system bell and specify the volume pitch and duration of the bell By default system notifications are used Use this module to determine how the system should inform you in the event of a problem when a task is performed or if an event requiring your immediate attention occurs In the upper part of the dialog select the application for which to configure the system notifications As soon as you select a program all events the application can send to the user are listed
37. With Resest restore the original settings Can cel aborts level adjustment 20 5 5 Undoing Mistakes Most modifications made in The GIMP can be undone To view a history of modi fications use the undo dialog included in the default window layout or open one from the toolbox menu with File gt Dialogs gt Undo History The dialog shows a base image and a series of editing changes that can be un done Use the yellow arrow at the bottom left to undo changes Use the green ar row at the right to redo an undone change In this way you can work back to the base image If you undo a modification then make a new one the undone modifi cation cannot be redone Changes can also be undone and redone with the Edit menu Alternatively use the shortcuts CtD42 and CHAN 20 6 Editing Images Advanced Features 20 6 1 Layers Layers are a very important aspect of The GIMP By drawing parts of your image on separate layers change move or delete those parts without damaging the rest of the image To understand how layers work imagine an image created from a stack of transparent sheets Different parts of the image are drawn on different sheets The stack can be rearranged changing which parts are on top Individ ual layers or groups of layers can shift position moving sections of the image to other locations New sheets can be added and others set aside 20 6 Editing Images Advanced Features Use the
38. as well as its X axis and Y axis a title In this case use Monthly Expenses as a chart title and Euro on the Y axis The X axis title is disabled by default Finally after clicking Create the chart is inserted into your spreadsheet FigureB 10 on the next page shows the sample chart in its final form SUSE LINUX SLINS eoyjo 810 eoyouedo eu 71 72 900 800 700 600 500 400 200 100 Overview of expenses Telephone Gas Sum 0 January February March April Figure 3 10 A Chart in Calc 3 6 4 Importing Spreadsheet Tables There is often a need to import data available as a table so it can be presented as a spreadsheet In Calc there are two ways to achieve this Importing Data from the Clipboard For example you may want to import stock exchange data Display the desired table in your web browser Then select the table with the mouse or using Copy depending on the browser This copies the selected data to the clipboard After that open a new OpenOffice org document with File gt New Spreadsheet Select the cell in which the inserted table should start Then select Edit gt Paste This inserts the table into the document with all the formatting specifications hyperlinks and other information included Importing Data with a Filter Import a saved HTML file to Calc by selecting File gt Open This opens
39. in Testfile with sort lt Testfile The output of the command sort is sent to the screen The text is sorted by the first letters of the individual lines If you need a new file containing the sorted list pipe the output of the command sort to a file To test this create an unsorted name list in an editor and save it under list in the test directory Then change into test and enter the com mand sort lt unsortedlist gt sortedlist Finally view the sorted list with less Just like the standard output the standard error output is sent to the console as well However to redirect the standard error output to a file named errors append 2 errors to the corresponding command Both standard output 21 1 Introduction to Bash and standard error are saved to one file named alloutput if you append amp alloutput Finally to append the output of a command to an already existing file the command must be followed by instead of a single gt 21 1 8 Archives and Data Compression Now that you have already created a number of files and directories consider the subject of archives and data compression Suppose you want to have the entire test directory packed in one file that you can save on a floppy disk as a backup copy or send by e mail To do so use the command t ar for tape archiver With tar help view all the options for the tar command The most important of these options are explained here IOUS eut ULM BUMJOM c for c
40. of the browser and also to stop loading a web page or reload it There are also items to change the text zoom for the pages displayed and to change the character coding Another item in this menu lets you view the source of a web page Go This is the navigation menu with items to go Back or Forward in the page history or to jump to the Home page Selecting History opens a win dow that lists the addresses of all the web pages recently visited with the browser Bookmarks Use Bookmarks to create and edit bookmarks Bookmarks can be arranged in folders Any previously created bookmarks can be selected from the menu Tools A number of useful browser functions can be accessed via the Tools menu For example access a search engine to find certain contents on the Internet The Cookie Manager gives control over the cookies the browser has stored on your computer and lists each cookie together with the address of the site from which it originated Use it to reverse previous decisions on whether to accept or reject cookies The Image Manager allows you to block images and advertising banners from web sites which improves speed The Password Manager can make things easier for you if you frequently log SUSE LINUX JOSMOIG SM PINZOIN SUL 117 118 in to sites both in internal networks and on the Internet Mozilla can re member the passwords for you However this feature also poses a certain security risk
41. queue and add transfers Adding Transfers Start KGet by pressing AM F2 and entering the command kget When the pro gram is started for the first time a dialog is displayed Confirm this dialog to in tegrate KGet in Konqueror When you close the dialog KGet is integrated in the system tray of the panel as an icon with a downward arrow Click this arrow to open the dialog displaying your transfers To add a transfer to the list select File gt Paste A dialog opens Enter a URL in the input field and confirm with OK Then specify the location for saving the downloaded file After all information has been entered the entry for the transfer is added to the main window of KGet and started Another way to add a transfer is by means of drag and drop Simply drag a file for example from an FTP server from Konqueror and drop it in the main win dow Timer Controlled Transfers You can also instruct KGet to perform your transfers at a specific time Activate Options gt Offline Mode All transfers inserted from this point are not started immediately but queued To start the clock double click the respective entry A dialog opens Select Advanced The dialog is expanded by the settings needed for starting the transfer at a certain time Enter the day month year and time Then close the window After making the desired settings for all your transfers set KGet back to the on line mode by deactivating
42. secure connections How do I connect to the Internet in Linux KInternet Connecting to the Internet on page 24 provides information about this I found a bug in SUSE LINUX Where should I report it First ascertain whether it is actually a bug in the program or just an error in operation or faulty configuration settings Also read the documentation in usr share doc packages and usr share doc howto The bug may have already been discovered Check in the support database at http sdb suse de sdb en html Enter a keyword or work your way forward or backward via the History link If it really is a bug send a description of it by e mail to feedback8 suse de How can I install applications Applications included in the SUSE LINUX CDs are best installed with YaST I only have an application in source code How can I install it Some know how is required with some applications Find more information in a good Linux book Here is a brief description Decompress the archive with tar xvzf name tar gz read the INSTALL or README files and follow the instruc tions Usually the following command sequence needs to be executed configure make make install No installation support is available for the compilation or self compiled programs Is my hardware supported It is best to refer to the component database at http hardwaredb suse deorhttp cdb suse de less usr share doc howto en Hardware HOWTO gz can also pro
43. system and network in which your mail server is located If you are not sure about the settings or items to select consult your ISP or system administrator Create outgoing mail boxes under the Sending tab Add lets you choose be tween the server types SMTP and sendmail SMTP is the right choice in most cases After making this selection a window appears in which to enter SMTP server data Provide a name and enter the server address as given to you by your ISP If the server wants you to authenticate yourself enable Server requires au thentication Security settings are under the Security tab Specify your preferred encryp tion method here If uncertain about which one to choose click Check What the Server Supports The respective settings are then tested and applied If necessary consult your system administrator Make settings for receiving e mail under the Receiving tab Use Add to cre ate a new account Choose between different methods for fetching mail such as local Mbox or Maildir format POP3 or IMAP Usually POP3 is suitable Af ter making your selection a window appears in which to enter the POP3 server data Enter the name of the server in the field at the top In the other fields enter the values provided by your ISP or your system administrator The fields User Server and Password are required The Security tab offers several methods for encryption and authorizati
44. the fingers hands arms and shoul ders are strained This leads to tense muscles The strain caused by a keyboard of inferior quality adds up over time Unfortunately the tiny movements produced while typing are very difficult to measure Risk factors include the RSI syndrome The keyboard is without doubt the most frequently used computer input device Therefore it must be especially well designed Ergonomic specialists often crit icize the fact that the and keys are too small Another basic problem is the cable which is often too short preventing a comfortable individual place ment Consider buying a wireless keyboard or an extension for the cable SUSE LINUX A comfortable visual distance varies individually At least 50 cm is required 92DJ O 10M SUI ui SOILIOUOBIJ 289 290 The keyboard should be separate from the screen It should also be inclin able but set in a stable position sufficiently large rubber coated feet The middle key row should not be more than 30 mm above the surface of the table There should be room to rest your hands in front of the keyboard If there is no built in wrist pad get one The marking must contrast with the color of the plastic and be easy to read The keyboard should have no intense color and a satin matt finish For the keyboard legend a dark script on a light background is recom mended Black keys are not ergonomic The form of the keys should enable light and accur
45. use the search bar or click the button to the right displaying the first letter of the contact s last name Add contacts or lists with the toolbar 13 4 E Mail To configure the mail settings in Evolution go to Shortcuts gt Inbox Then acti vate Tools gt Settings 13 4 E Mail 13 4 1 Configuring Accounts Evolution is capable of fetching e mail from multiple mail accounts The account from which to send e mail can be selected when composing a message To edit a current account select the account in Settings gt Mail Accounts and click Edit To add a new account click Add The configuration assistant described in Starting Evolution on page 150 opens To delete an account select it and click Delete To make an account the default account for sending e mail select the desired ac count then press Default To disable fetching e mail from an account select the account then click Disable A disabled account can still be used as the address for sending but that account is not checked for incoming e mail If necessary re activate the account with Enable 13 4 2 Mail Preferences Use Mail Preferences to select or disable the quote highlight color or how long after opening a message is marked as read Also make settings regarding how images in HTML mail messages are handled 13 4 3 Creating Messages To compose a new message click New gt Mail Message
46. 1000 Ix for an open plan office 500 750 Ix should be emitted by the individual workstation lighting How ever individual lamps are often problematic If they are too strong the con trast to the general lighting is too great Harmonic soft transitions are con sidered more pleasant The lighting should not flicker In the case of worn out fluorescent lamps a flickering can sometimes be noticed from the corner of the eye Avoid dark shadows 284 22 1 The Working Environment Ceiling lights should emit light diagonally from above Lighting strips should be set perpendicular to the screen table The line of sight at the screen table should run parallel to the lighting strips Whether the lighting is considered to be pleasant depends on the color tem perature and light color of the lamp type Warm white or neutral white is recommended The light requirement depends not only on the working task but also on age older people need more light The fact that older people often have only a small lamp in their homes has nothing to do with their light require ment but rather with the fact that they want to save electricity A screen workstation near daylight requires optimum shielding against direct and reflex glare especially when the line of sight is directly out the window or at a 45 degree angle to it The built in antiglare facilities should be variable Under no circumstances should artificial illumination cause re fle
47. 3 Event Input j Event Output Type Note Type Note Channel 0 Channel Offset Note 36 Velocity 0 o 1 o J 0 o lala e olojo RI B Note Offset Velocity 0 127 Output to ALSA Port 0 T N E e Add Map Clone Map Rename Map RemoveMap Figure 15 13 Configuring Split Zones with QMidiRoute The program QMidiRoute enables flexible MIDI routing The MIDI events as received at the writable MIDI port are presented as one or several maps from which they can be selected and transformed into other events To mention just SUSE LINUX xnu ui PUNOS 197 198 one practical application of this technique you could split a keyboard into sev eral regions each sending on a different MIDI channel SMidiRoute also has a window listing all MIDI events received on the input port 15 10 MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card Some sound cards do not have a WaveTable synthesizer for playing MIDI files with the loaded sound font or instrument patch In this case use a software WaveTable synthesizer like fluidsynth or timidity 15 10 1 The Sound Font Synthesizer fluidsynth After the program is started with a command like fluidsynth a alsa m alsa seq gm sf2 fluidsynth appears in the list of writable MIDI ports and can be used as sound source In this example gm s 2 is a file in the widely used So
48. 532 Installing Programs on the Handheld Contents 6 Scheduling with KOrganizer 6 1 Starting KOrganizer 6 2 Configuring KOrganizer 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 7 Address Management with KAddressBook 7 2 Creating a New Contact Creating Address Lists 7A Searching Address Data 75 Importing and Exporting Address Data For More Information 7 3 7 6 Using the Calendar 63 1 Events 6 8 2 _ Attendees 6 3 3 To Do Items 6 3 4 Categories Printing 0 Address Book III Internet 8 The Web Browser Konqueror 8 1 Starting Konqueror and Opening Web Pages 8 2 Saving Web Pages and Graphics Enhanced Web Browsing Internet Keywords 8 3 8 4 Bookmarks 8 5 Java and JavaScript 8 6 For More Information 105 107 SUSE LINUX vil 9 The Web Browser Galeon 111 9 1 Optimized for the Web o o ooo 112 A a eS ES 113 93 SmartBookmarks e eee eee ee 113 a a oe ra ed 113 95 ForMorelnformation es 114 10 The Mozilla Web Browser 115 re X Xu nd eA Ig e dede da 116 10 4 1 TheMenuBar lle 117 Ub ee En Gem ASG hod 118 10 1 3 The Personal Toolbar o 118 10 1 4 Sidebar o s i uen eR gum n RR Roe e Rem o i 119 TIC 119 1033 Preferences 22e 120 11 Encryption with KGpg 123 111 Key Management lee 124 TT 124 11 1 2 Exporting the Public Key
49. CD quality In the configuration dialog of the module select New File to open a file browser If the file displayed under File is successfully generated the buttons under Record are activated and can be used 15 12 NoteEdit and MIDI Sequencers NoteEdit is one of the most comprehensive Linux applications for editing scores with a graphical interface As the entered notes are sounded immediately by the selected MIDI device even newcomers can easily prepare scores with NoteEdit This program offers the entire range of music symbols for writing scores With NoteEdit even play and record MIDI files The scores can be exported in several formats including MusicTeX and LilyPond Figure 15 17 The Composition Editor NoteEdit Start the application with noteedit A few examples can be found in usr share doc packages noteedit examples which can be opened with SUSE LINUX xnur ui punog 205 206 File gt Open Use TSE3 gt TSE3 Midi In to import MIDI files These are loaded into the editor with TSE3 gt Score Set various options for the conver sion in the Filter dialog box Midi gt Devices allows selection of one of the ALSA MIDI devices configured in the system This device is then used for playback as well as for recording The instrument the MIDI channel and many other parameters such as the stereo panorama can b
50. Colors e s Font Replacement Security El Load Save El Language Settings El Internet El Text Document EI HTML Document El Spreadsheet lt l No automatie postioning M Paste clipboard E o J ws mb m SEM MN MN M MI El Data Sources Figure 3 2 The Options Dialog Load Save This entry includes settings related to the opening and saving of several file types There is a dialog for general settings and several special dialogs to define how external formats should be handled Language Settings This entry covers various settings related to languages and writing aids namely your locale and spell checker settings This is also the place to enable support for Asian languages Internet This entry includes dialogs to configure any proxies and to change settings related to search engines Text Document Under this entry configure global word processing options such as the basic fonts and layout Writer should use HTML Document Under this entry change the settings related to the HTML authoring features of OpenOffice org Spreadsheet Use this to change settings for Calc such as those related to sort lists and grids Presentation Under this entry change settings that should apply to all presen tations For example specify the measurement unit for the grid used to ar range elements 3 4 Changing the Global Settings Drawing This entry covers settings related to the vector drawin
51. Create amp manage invitations and in the dialog that opens choose be tween Create Personal Invitation and Invite via Email In the first case the 1 4 Important Utilities program generates an invitation that includes the IP address of the host the pass word and expiry time This data must be given to the recipient manually If you select Invite via Email all the necessary data is transmitted by e mail KMail starts automatically and generates an e mail message with the needed data host password and expiry If the recipient also uses KDE and KMail he or she can connect to your desktop simply by clicking the link provided at the end of the message Users of other desktops need to start a suitable VNC viewer and copy the link into its address field KDE informs you whenever a VNC connection is requested asking you whether to allow or deny the connection Desktop Sharing Control Center doptseq Jay eut File View Help Index Search Help Access Network Invitations Open invitations 4 wy Appearance amp Themes Desktop Internet amp Network Desktop Sharing a Email File Sharing M Local Network Brow Preferences B Proxy Create amp Manage Invitations J Uninvited Connections iC Allow uninvited connections 4 Desktop Sharing VNC invitation KMail Message Edit View Options Attach Tools Settings Help Cr
52. H W In The S PDIF inputs are shown to the right The input and output levels of the analog channels must be set under Analog Volume Use the Monitor Mixer sliders for digital mixing The respective levels are dis played in the Digital Mixer For each output channel the Patchbay contains a row of radio buttons for selecting the desired channel source Analog Inputs and Outputs Adjust the amplification for the analog to digital and digital to analog convert ers under Analog Volume The DAC sliders are used for the output channels and the ADC sliders are used for the input channels Use the radio buttons to switch the levels between 4 dBu and 10 dBV The first setting is intended for audio professionals The latter is for private purposes 15 2 Mixers 15 2 8 Configuration of the S PDIF Channels The S PDIF channel settings are made under Hardware Settings The Envy24 chip reacts to volume changes with a delay that can be configured with Volume Change 15 3 Players Linux offers a variety of programs for playing audio CDs and various music for mats such as MP3 OGG and WAV files Where possible the supported formats of the players are listed 15 3 1 amaroK As well as Kscd which is a pure audio CD player KDE comes with the amaroK media player which handles various audio formats such as MP3 and OGG and plays the streaming audio broadcast by radio stations on the Internet Th
53. IDI 0 0 13 50 Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 0 JS Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 1 1332 Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 2 1323 Emul0k1 WaveTable Emul0k1 Port 3 The first column lists the internal port numbers by which the device is addressed by the ALSA driver The other columns show the designation and port name of the device Apart from the external MIDI port several WaveTable ports are listed Use a command like pmidi p 73 0 mysong mid to play a MIDI file over one of the listed ports SUSE LINUX xnur ui PUNOS 193 194 Note If a MIDI player is interrupted during playback a continuous sound may persist If this happens run the a11 notes off script or restart ALSA as root with rcalsasound restart Note ei Many sound cards like Soundblaster AWE and Live have an internal WaveTable synthesizer that converts MIDI events into audible sounds These MIDI events can be sent to the WaveTable synthesizer by an external MIDI key board or by a program such as a MIDI player or sequencer For Soundblaster AWE and Live cards the WaveTable synthesizer must be initialized with a sound font before any sound can be heard 15 9 1 Loading Sound Fonts SB Live and AWE The package awes fx contains the sfx1oad command for loading sound fonts in Soundblaster AWE and Live cards Suitable sound font files are available on the driver CD of your sound card The start up script of ALSA can automatically load the sound fonts req
54. MIDI ports specify the port address of the program after the program name For example assign port number 128 0 to the first pro gram and 129 0 to the second The ports of the programs are also displayed by kaconnect 15 9 ALSA and MIDI As vkeybd was executed without the addr parameter the connection be tween the program port and the WaveTable port or the external MIDI port can now be established manually To do this select the respective ports and click con nect To use the command line tool aconnect enter aconnect 128 0 73 0 or the respective ports to establish a unidirectional connection between the sender port 128 0 and the receiver port 73 0 You can now establish a connection between the MIDI port of the keyboard and the MIDI port of the ALSA sequencer viewer If you modify keyboard settings such as the panning or the pitch wheel which must first be activated under View these changes are promptly reflected in aseqview List the ports available for sending and receiving as well as their connection sta tus with aconnect iloraconnect ol Terminate connections established with aconnect with the option d for example aconnect d 128 0 129 0 To terminate all connections enter aconnect x Get information about other options with man aconnect Note aseqnet can be used to establish MIDI connections over a network Note Eile About Event Log Unmatched MIDIMap1 MIDIMap2 MIDI Map
55. OK To abort press Cancel If the image has features that cannot be saved in the chosen format a dialog appears SUSE LINUX dINIS eu UM sordos Buyoindiuny 241 242 with choices for resolving the situation Choosing Export if offered normally gives the desired results A window then opens with the options of the format Reasonable default values are provided 20 5 Editing Images Basics 20 5 1 Changing the Image Size Once an image is scanned or a digital photograph is loaded from the camera it is often necessary to modify the size for display on a web page or for printing Images can easily be made smaller either by scaling them down or by cutting off parts of them Making an image larger is much more problematic Because of the nature of pixel graphics quality is lost when an image is made larger It is recom mended to keep a copy of your original image before scaling or cropping Cropping an Image Cropping an image works like cutting the edges off a piece of paper Select the crop tool from the toolbox it resembles a scalpel or with Tools gt Transform Tools gt Crop amp Resize Click a starting corner and drag to outline the area to keep A small window opens with information about the starting point and the size of the selected area Adjust these values by clicking and dragging a corner of the crop box or by adjusting the values in the window From Selection adjusts the c
56. Output gain dB i Resonance Poly Mvclpf Resonance be 10 channel O param 34 Resonance gain is Input gain dB Poly Mvclpf amp Poly Saw VCO ID 10 t Input gain dB Y Log Set Min Set Max Reset Min Max Min 10 508 3 702 Max 10 000 iL Enable note events I Follow Configuration Dialog X Follow MIDI MIDI Channel Omni Add to Parameter View Bind Clear Binding Clear All Toggle MIDI Sign Figure 15 16 MIDI Controllers and Module Parameters in the Control Center do this the readable MIDI ports must be connected with the writable MIDI port The example example midiout controller ams shows the change in an en velope with autogenerated controller events Easily follow the movement of the envelope by opening the configuration dialog of the ENV module ID 5 with the right mouse button The option Follow MIDI in the Control Center should be deactivated while this patch is running If you connect the readable MIDI ports of AlsaModularSynth with a MIDI sound generator example_midiout_note ams plays scales controlled by an LFO example_midiout_note_velocity ams shows that the velocity data can also be autogenerated example_midiout_random ams generates random mu sic with drums 15 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor 15 11 6 Writing WAV Files with the WAV Out Module Using the WAV Out module directly record the signals generated or processed by AlsaModularSynth as a WAV file in
57. PC 211 165 Webcam Operation withgqcam 212 UJO2Q9M PUD Opo O9plA AL 208 16 1 Watching TV with motv motv is an improved successor to xawtv It incorporates all essential functions into the user interface Start the application with SUSE gt Multimedia Video Start it at the command line with mot v Initially only a TV window ap pears after the application starts Open a menu window by right clicking it 591 25 MHz 36 Arte 4 Figure 16 1 The TV Application moto 16 1 1 Video Source and Network Search In Settings Input select the video source If you select Television here set up the broadcasting network before starting the application This automatically takes place with the network search also found under the Settings menu If you click Save settings the network found is entered into the xawtv file in your home directory and will be available the next time you start the application Note If you do not want to browse for all available channels find the next channel with CH If needed subsequently adjust the broadcast frequency with or 2 Note S 16 1 Watching TV with motv 16 1 2 From Silent Film to Sound Film The audio output of the TV card is connected to the line input of your sound card to the speakers or to an amplifier Some TV cards can change the volume of the audio output The volume
58. See Figure 11 1 on the facing page Confirm your settings with OK The next dialog asks you to enter a password After doing so twice the program generates the key pair and display a summary It is a good idea to save or print a revocation certificate right away Such a cer tificate will be needed if you forget the password for your private key so need to revoke it After confirming with OK KGpg displays its main window See Fig ure 11 2 on page 126 11 1 2 Exporting the Public Key After generating your key pair make the public key available to other users This enables them to use it to encrypt or sign the messages or files they send you To 11 1 Key Management Generate Key Pair Name Email Comment optional Expiration Never Key size 1024 Algorithm DSA amp ElGamal j Expert Mode 3 Cancel Figure 11 1 KGpg Creating a Key make the public key available for others select Keys Export Public Key s The dialog that opens offers four options Email Your public key is sent to a recipient of your choice by e mail If you ac tivate this option and confirm with OK the dialog for creating a new e mail message with KMail appears Enter the recipient and click Send The recipient will receive your key and can then send you encrypted contents Clipboard You can place your public key here before you continue to process it
59. The Search Function of the SUSE Help Center To search all installed information sources of SUSE LINUX generate a search in dex and set a number of search parameters To do this open the Search tab See Figure A 2 Search Contents Search GI Method and Max results 5 ES Scope selection Default Scope z Administration vHardware H0O cups Linux Documentation DI Browse info page i 1 Manpages Development i E Bash Reference A e Create Search Index j Figure A 2 Configuring the Search Function If no search index was generated previously the system automatically prompts you to do so when you click the Search tab or enter a search string and click Search In the dialog window for generating the search index Figure A 3 on the next page use the check boxes to determine the information sources to index The index is generated when you exit the dialog with OK SUSE LINUX uoiuojueuunooc pub dJ eH 295 296 Index HTML Search Search Scope Status El Bash Reference Missing O Documentation for Linux PAM Missing O cups Missing Index Directory Ivar cache susehelp Ej Apply Cancel Figure A 3 Generating a Search Index To limit the search base and the hit list as precisely as possible use the three drop down menus to determine the number of displayed hits and the selection area of sources to search T
60. The actual software must be present before spam messages can be filtered Run YaST as user root and install the package spamassassin with the package manager Then configure the system to activate the SpamAssassin service on system start up by opening the runlevel editor in YaST located under System Search the list of services for spamd and select activate Confirm the choice with Finish This completes the SpamAssassin installation process Create an additional folder in KMail naming it spam for instance in which to store the messages classified as spam If you already have collected some spam messages move as many of them as possible into this folder This folder can be used later as a training stock and allows the tool to decide which of your incoming messages should be classified as spam SUSE LINUX uoupoliddy HON Idy eur ION 143 144 Spam Filtering KMail requires two filters for spam processing The first filter examines the size of a message Select Settings gt Config ure filters In the dialog that appears create a new filter entry and name it SpamAssassin for example Select Size in bytes gt as the filtering property and is less than as the qualifier Set the threshold to 300000 Under Filter actions select pipe through application and enter spamc in the field next to it Note that the option abort processing here upon matching filter condition
61. The job list consists of eight columns The job ID is automatically assigned by the print system to identify the various jobs The next column contains the login of the user who sent the job followed by the file name of the document The status column indicates whether a job is still in the queue currently being printed or already completed Next the size of the document is displayed in kilobytes and SUSE LINUX _______ 29 30 number of pages The default priority of 50 can be increased or reduced if nec essary Billing information can be cost centers or other company specific infor mation If you right click a job in the list the Jobs menu opens under the mouse pointer allowing you to select an action Only a few functions are available for completed jobs If you activate Keep window permanent KJobViewer opens automatically when you log in the next time You can also start KJobViewer us ing the printer icon in the panel 1 4 7 Formatting Floppy Disks with KFloppy KFloppy is the floppy disk formatter of KDE Start the program from the main menu or from the command line with the command k 1oppy KFloppy opens a dialog shown in Figure 1 6 on the next page in which to specify a number of set tings Under Floppy Drive select the primary or the secondary drive assuming your machine has two floppy disk drives The default setting for the size is 3 5 1 44 MB which is the most commonly used floppy disk type The
62. Use custom icons e c r Folder Type Mailbox format maildir r Associated Mailing List E Folder holds a mailing list Old Message Expiry Expire old messages in this folder T a v r Identity Sender Standard Default 5 r Show Sender Receiver Show Default y yc OS Esca g Figure 12 3 Creating New Folders Under the tab Old Message Expiry specify the expiration date for read and un read messages and what should happen with them after expiration If you intend to use the folder to store messages from a mailing list set the necessary options under the Associated Mailing List tab To move one or several messages from one folder to another highlight the mes sages to move then press M or select Message gt Move to In the list of fold ers that appears select the folder to which to move your messages Messages can also be moved by dragging them from the upper window and dropping them into the appropriate folder in the left window 12 7 Message Folders To remove all the messages from a folder click Folder Empty All messages located in the folder are then moved to the trash Note Messages are not deleted permanently until you empty the trash Note 12 8 Importing Mail KMail assists in importing e mail messages from previously used applications Select Tools gt Import messages to
63. When you select a tool and move the cursor onto an image the cursor s appearance changes to reflect the chosen tool With many tools an icon of the current tool is shown along with the arrow For paint tools an outline of the current brush is shown allowing you to see exactly where you will be painting in the image and how large an area will be painted dINIS eu UM sordos Buyoindiuny Selecting Colors By default paint tools use the foreground color However this can be changed in the tool options of fill tools To select the color first click the display box of the foreground or background color as desired A dialog with four tabs opens These tabs provide different color selection meth ods Only the first tab shown in Figure on the following page is described here The new color is shown in Current The previous color is shown in Old The easiest way to select a color is using the colored areas in the boxes to the left In the narrow vertical bar click a color similar to the desired color The larger box to the left then shows available nuances Click the desired color It is then shown in Current If that color is not what you want try again The arrow button to the right of Current enables saving a number of possible colors Click the arrow to copy the current color to the history A color can then be selected by clicking it in the history A color can also be selected by directly entering its hexade
64. a calendar The application also provides a complete address book including the ability to send contact informa tion to others in vCard format 13 1 Starting Evolution o o 150 13 2 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs 150 Poe ee ae 151 134 EMall 152 13 5 Calendar ix 24 e eed Btw dre Mek Sx a 157 13 06 Contacts ix o oo 3 dass 158 Lud ee ee wee 159 13 8 For More Information 8 160 WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD PUD IDJA 3 UY uounjo 3 150 13 1 Starting Evolution Start Evolution from the main menu or with evolution When started for the first time Evolution offers a configuration assistant If it is not opened automat ically select Tools gt Settings gt Mail Accounts and click Add Click Next to access the assistant Enter your name and your e mail address in the respective fields Additional addresses can be configured later Click Next Select the appropriate incoming e mail format for this address in Server Type POP is the most common format for downloading mail from a remote server IMAP works with mail folders on a special server Obtain this information from your ISP or server administrator Complete the other relevant fields displayed when the server type is selected Click Next when finished The next set of information to enter is about mail delivery This is used for all con f
65. a dialog window in which to select Web Page 3 6 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc OpenOffice org Calc under File type Use the arrow keys to scroll the list of file types Finally select the file name then Open to import the table 3 7 Creating Graphics Using OpenOffice org Draw Draw can be used to create vector graphics Vector graphics are images in which lines and curves are defined through certain parameters such as the location of points and the curvature To create a new drawing start Draw from the main menu with Applications gt OpenOffice org Draw If OpenOffice org is already running select File New gt Drawing The graphical objects available in Draw can be modified in various aspects such as line thickness line type color and fill Try to draw a rectangle In the main toolbar which is displayed on the left side click the filled rectangle button fifth from top and keep the mouse button pressed for a few seconds until an additional toolbar opens This includes a se lection of filled and unfilled rectangles and squares some of them with rounded corners Select one of the filled rectangles The mouse cursor should turn into a cross Now move the cursor to the canvas and click it dragging the mouse to wards the bottom right Draw shows the outline of a rectangle that is reshaped as you move When you are satisfied with the size of the object release the mouse butto
66. access the TV card prior to accessing the webcam the bttv driver is loaded The webcam driver is loaded automatically when your we bcam is connected to the USB Start motv at the command line with the parame ter c dev videol to access the webcam Access the TV card with motv c dev videoO When connecting the webcam to the USB before the bttv driver has been auto matically loaded for example by starting a TV application dev videoO is re served for the webcam In this case if you start motv with the c dev videol parameter to access the TV card you might get an error message because the bttv driver was not automatically loaded Solve this problem by loading the driver separately with modprobe bttv as the user root Access an overview of the configurable video devices on your system with motv hwscan 16 2 Video Text with alevt 16 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC From some broadcasters an EPG signal Electronic Program Guide is transmit ted along with the video text signal Easily view this electronic guide using the program nxtvepg To do this however you must have a TV card supported by the bttv driver and be able to receive one of the channels broadcast with an EPG With nxtvepg the broadcasts are sorted according to channel and topic such as movie and sport and filtered according to criteria such as Live Stereo or Subtitle Start the application via the SUSE gt Multimedia gt
67. activate this option and adjust the volume with the slider Mouse The mouse configuration comprises three tabs General Advanced and Mouse Navigation The configuration options of the General tab are Button Mapping Here specify right handed or left handed use of your mouse Icons Determine how the system should react to clicks and double clicks The default setting for the KDE desktop is a single click for opening files or fold ers and a mouse pointer that changes its appearance when it is moved over icons To use double click for opening files and folders select Double click to open files and folders select icons on first click Finally set the size and color of the pointer and the kind of visual feedback given when programs are started Under the Pointer Theme tab choose among a number of themes to give the mouse pointer an appearance to your liking The configuration options of the Advanced tab are SUSE LINUX 13 14 Pointer Acceleration The pointer acceleration defines the relation between the speed with which you move the input device mouse and the pointer speed as displayed on the screen The higher the selected factor is the more difficult it is to control the screen pointer Pointer Threshold The threshold in pixels specifies the distance the pointer must move before the specified pointer acceleration actually comes into force In this way you have exact control o
68. active cell has a thick black frame around it To activate another cell move the frame with the cursor keys or click another cell with the mouse You can edit a cell if it is currently active 3 6 Soreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 3 6 Changing Cell Attributes To enter something in a cell simply write in that cell By default texts are aligned to the left and numbers to the right To confirm your entry press Enter To change the formatting of selected cells right click to open a context menu and select For mat Cells This opens a dialog in which to change the cell attributes The dia log as shown in Figure 3 7 has the tabs Numbers Font Font Effects Align ment Borders Background and Cell Protection By enabling Protected un der Cell Protection prevent a cell from being modified feet 1 ok coma Hee Bee Figure 3 7 The Cell Attributes Dialog 3 6 2 A Practical Example Monthly Expenses Calculations can be made using formulas Any numeric values entered in cells can be used in formulas by referring to the unique coordinates of each cell For example you may want to keep a record of your monthly expenses This could SUSE LINUX SLINS SIWO 8610 eoyjouedo SUI 69 70 be done by writing a few items into a very basic spreadsheet as in Figure B 8 The cell B3 contains the phone bill for January and B4 the fuel expenses To add
69. any KDE application Select ing it starts KDEPrintFax which requests the target phone number and sends the fax Non KDE applications can also use this function if their print command can be set manually In this case replace 1pr with kprinter When you print a docu ment the KDE print menu will be displayed along with the possibility to trans mit fax messages Caution To date capisuitefax does not support the full range of HylaFAX features Thus features such as the resolution settings are currently ignored Caution 14 2 3 Operation of the Answering Machine If e mail transmission was not deactivated voice messages left on the answer ing machine are sent by e mail to the recipient associated with the dialed phone number Thus the operation of the answering machine does not require any additional description All incoming messages can be received and opened in the e mail client For backup purposes the incoming messages are also stored in var spool capisuite users dbreplaceable username received The recording of the personal welcome message is performed directly over the re mote access feature of the answering machine To access your answering machine remotely call your associated number from any telephone Enter the previously defined PIN during the welcome message playback Wait a few seconds if you mistype your PIN then try again after the beep Shortly after having correctly en tered the PIN the answer
70. available plug ins XMMS plug ins are always displayed in an extra window In some cases there is an option to display them in fullscreen mode For some plug ins you may not get a smooth visual effect unless you use a 3D accelerated graphics card SUSE LINUX ________ 183 184 15 3 2 XMMS XMMS is another full featured media player with robust audio support so that pops or breaks during playback should be very rare The application is easy to use The button for displaying the menu is located in the upper left corner of the program window OpenGL Spectrum Analyzer O X MULTIMEDIA SY STEM 20db PREAMP 60 170 310 600 IK 3K 6K IK 14K IGK Figure 15 5 XMMS with Equalizer OpenGL Spectrum Analyzer and Infinity Plug Ins Select the output plug in module with Options gt Preferences gt Audio I O Plugins If the xmms kde package is installed the aRts sound server can be con figured here Note XMMS automatically redirects its output to the Disk Writer Plugin if it is not able to find a configured sound card In this case the played files are written to the hard disk as WAV files The time display then runs faster than when playing the output through a sound card Note E 15 3 Players Various visualization plug ins can be started through Options gt Preferences gt Visualization Plugins If you have a graphics card with 3D a
71. can also remind you of birthdays and meetings if you enable this function ix emus EO RENE I dd dod 92 ge ante Sie E Se a 92 63 Using the Calendar o o o 94 64 Printing 9 e 9 d m hn n ey oy ded 96 65 Address Book llle 96 JeziuoBJOM UM Guinpeuosg 92 6 1 Starting KOrganizer Start KOrganizer from the main menu or with korganizer The main window has several toolbars a menu bar the date navigator with a month view of the cal endar the main part displaying the currently selected calendar view and a list containing all the current to do items All the common program actions such as saving printing and creating or deleting events can be performed from the menus See Figure 6 1 Eile Edit View Go Actions Schedule Settings Help Jg b Od eve Q QOEmm D5oouo OJLOJ March 2004 OJO Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri5 Sat6 Sun7 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun gt B aCe 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 00 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 13 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 guo 09 00 T 14 29 30 31 B 10 00 T3 To do items ul al riorit Incoming messages 0 Outgoing messages 0 Figure 6 1 The Main Window of KOrganizer KOrganizer can also be started in a windows containing other tools for of fice planning More details are available in The Information Manager Kontact on page 4 6 2 Configuring KOrganizer To configure KOrganizer select Settings
72. column Double click the directory to make it the current one moves up a level in the hierarchy The center column shows the files available in the current directory Click a file name to select it If available a preview of the selected file is shown in the right column Alternatively enter a file name in the field towards the bottom Pressing while entering a name in the field attempts to complete the name Available completions are then listed in the Folders and Files columns Select one or en ter enough of the name to identify the file uniquely then press again Click OK to open the selected image Press Cancel to skip opening an image 20 3 3 The Image Window The new or opened image appears in its own window The menu bar in the top of the window provides access to all image functions Alternatively access the menu by right clicking the image or clicking the small arrow button in the left corner of the rulers File offers the standard file options such as Save and Print Close closes the current image Quit closes the entire application With the items in the View menu control the display of the image and the im age window New View opens a second display window of the current image Changes made in one view are reflected in all other views of that image Alter nate views are useful for magnifying a part of an image for manipulation while seeing the complete im
73. compression can be achieved Instead of the bit rate specify the 15 8 Compressing Audio Data desired quality with the parameter q The parameter b determines the average bit rate m and M can be used to specify the minimum and maximum bit rate 099123 is a command line Ogg player The program requires the specification of a playback device Start it with a command like 099123 d alsa09 mysong ogg 15 9 ALSA and MIDI Apart from the possibility to play PCM data many sound cards also offer MIDI functionality The ALSA MIDI sequencer implements an efficient architecture for routing MIDI data You need the packages pmidi aseqview vkeybd awesfx snd sf2 and kalsatools Many sound cards have an external MIDI port for connecting MIDI devices such as synthesizers keyboards and sound modules If the MIDI port of the card is supported by ALSA use a sequencer application such as jazz to record and play MIDI files An overview of the MIDI devices provided by your card is available in the KDE Control Center under Sound amp Multimedia gt Sound System MIDI Here also determine the devices to use for playing MIDI files On the command line list the available MIDI devices and their internal ALSA port num bers with the command pmidi 1 For a Soundblaster Live card the listing would appear as in Example Example 15 1 MIDI Devices of a Soundblaster Live Card Port Client name Port name F230 External MIDI 0
74. download manager causes the browser to open the full featured download manager dialog Open a progress dialog limits the dialog to a progress bar displayed during download Turn off all download feedback by enabling Don t open anything Privacy amp Security This is one of the most important parts of the preferences with a number of settings related to cookie handling and the built in pass word management In addition to that there is an entry in which to specify from which web sites Mozilla should accept images JOSMOIG GSM PINZOIN SUL To maintain a degree of privacy it is often a good idea to accept cookies only from the server from which the requested document is received To achieve this enable Enable cookies for the originating web site only En abling Disable cookies may cause some web pages not to function in the intended way With Manage Stored Cookies inspect the properties of any cookies that have been accepted Use the Images dialog to define similar settings for the handling of graph ics This is especially useful if you do not want to clog an already slow con nection modems with the download of large images The dialog also al lows you to suppress the animation of any images To achieve this just se lect Never under the Animated images should loop header In the Passwords dialog decide whether Mozilla should store any pass words entered Consider both conve
75. files and directories using the rm and rmdir commands At the end of this chapter find a list of the most important commands and a brief descrip tion of their functions 21 1 Introduction to Bash 21 2 Users and Access Permissions Since its inception in the early 1990s Linux has been developed as a multiuser system Any number of users can work on it simultaneously Users need to log in to the system before starting a session at their workstations Each user has a user name with a corresponding password This differentiation of users guar antees that unauthorized users cannot see files for which they do not have per mission Larger changes to the system such as installing new programs are also usually impossible or restricted for normal users Only the s root user or super user has the unrestricted capacity to make changes to the system and has unlim ited access to all files Those who use this concept wisely only logging in with full root access when necessary can cut back the risk of unintentional loss of data Because under normal circumstances only root can delete system files or format hard disks the threat from the Trojan horse effect or from accidentally entering de structive commands can be significantly reduced 21 2 1 File System Permissions Basically every file in a Linux file system belongs to a user and a group Both of these proprietary groups and all others can be authorized to write read or exe cute these fil
76. first three characters refer to whether the file is readable r or not amp 8211 A win the middle portion symbolizes that the corresponding object can be edited and a dash amp 8211 means it is not possible to write to the file An x in the third po sition denotes that the object can be executed Because the file in this ex ample is a text file and not one that is executable executable access for this particular file is not needed In this example tux has as owner of the file Roadmap read r and write access w to it but cannot execute it x The members of the group project3 can read the file but they cannot modify it or execute it Other users do not have any access to this file Other permissions can be as signed by means of ACLs Access Control Lists See Access Control Lists on page 269 for details and refer to the chapter in the Administration Guide for further background information Directory Permissions Access permissions for directories have the type d For directories the individual permissions have a slightly different meaning Example 21 2 Sample Output Showing Directory Permissions drwxrwxr x 1 tux project3 35 Jun 21 15 15 ProjectData In Output 21 2 the owner tux and the owning group project 3 of the directory ProjectData are easy to recognize In contrast to the file access permissions from File Access on the page before the set reading permis sion r means that the contents of the
77. in the lower window Determine the notification type for each notification in the Actions dialog The standard view of the system notification dialog only offers Play a sound for audible notification Click More Options to access other action modes You can log the notification to a file execute a program or show the message in a pop up window In the lower part of the dialog under Quick Controls globally activate or deactivate the actions for all programs 1 2 A Appearance This item features all fine tuning options for the appearance of your desktop Screensaver The module for selecting and configuring the screensaver consists of three parts Select a suitable screensaver from the list to the left The preview to the right shows how the selected program looks Use Setup to configure the selected screensaver and Test to view it in full screen mode Start Screensaver Automatically For the screensaver to be activated automat ically select this option and specify the time in minutes after which the screensaver should be activated Require Password to Stop Screensaver The screensaver can lock your workstation and require a password for the release 1 2 Settings Colors Use this module to manage and edit color schemes for your desktop Select one of the many existing schemes The preview window displays all desktop elements in the defined colors To change the color of one or several widgets select th
78. in the toolbar to open a menu with which to change the position of the toolbar switch from icons to text change the icon size and display or hide the individual bars Start the configuration dialog with Configure Toolbars To the right the toolbar features the Konqueror icon which is animated while a directory or web page is loaded 1 3 3 The Location Bar The location bar is preceded by a black symbol with a white X If you click this icon the contents of the line are deleted allowing entry of a new location Valid locations can be path specifications like the one that appears when the home di rectory is displayed or web page URLs After entering an address press or click Go to the right of the input line Access directories or web pages visited recently via the black arrow to the right of the location bar This function saves some typing if you need to access certain contents repeatedly If there are loca tions that you need to view again and again it is more convenient to create book marks for them 1 3 4 The Main Window The main window displays the content of the selected directory If you click an icon the respective file is displayed in Konqueror or loaded into the respective application for further processing Clicking an RPM package lists the contents of the file Selecting Install package with YaST prompts you to enter the root password after which the package is installed If you right click an icon a
79. is re quired to tell the shell that the current directory is the destination to which to move the file in this example refers to your home directory 21 1 5 Wild Cards Another convenience offered by the shell is wild cards There are four different types of these in Bash Matches exactly one arbitrary character Matches any number of characters set Matches one of the characters from the group specified inside the square brackets which is represented here by the string set set Matches one character other than those identified by set Assuming that your test directory contains the files Test file Testfilel Testfile2 and datafile the command 1s Testfile lists the files Testfileland Testfile2 With 1s Test the list will also include Testfile Thecommand 1s fil shows allthe sample files Finally you can use the set wild card to address all sample files whose last character is a num ber 1s Testfile 1 9 Of the four types of wild cards the most inclusive one is the asterisk It could be used to copy all files contained in one directory to another one or to delete all files with one command The command rm il for instance would delete all files in the current directory whose name includes the string fil SUSE LINUX IOUS eut ULM BUMJOM 261 262 21 1 6 Less and More Linux includes two small programs for viewing text files directly in the shell Rather than starting an editor to read a fil
80. just move the cursor to the desired position using the arrow keys and start typing Use to search in the history The expansion function Expand a file name to its full length after typ ing its first letters until it can be uniquely identified To do so type the first letters then hit Tab If there are several file names starting with the same letters obtain a list of them by hitting Tob twice First Example Managing Files Now that you know what a command looks like which directories exist in SUSE LINUX and how to speed up things when using Bash put this knowledge into practice with a small exercise 1 2 Open a console from the KDE desktop by clicking the shell icon Enter the 1s command to see the contents of your home directory Use the command mkdi r which stands for make directory to create a new subdirectory called test by entering mkdir test Now launch the KEdit editor by pressing and entering kedit in the input field Type a few letters in the editor then save the file as Test file in your home directory Linux distinguishes between uppercase and lower case For this example use an uppercase T View the contents of your home directory again Instead of typing 1s again just press 7 twice and the 1s command should reappear at the prompt To execute the command hit Enter The newly created directory test should appear in blue letters and Test file in black This is how directories and fi
81. menus Modify preference settings for Kooka in Settings SUSE LINUX uoupooigddy Guiuupos v O 00y 229 230 Eile Image Settings Help a NES FAIA Y Fale C OM mageName sze lrome lel Image Viewer Scan Preview Kooka Gallery 5 items 3j kscan_0001 bmp 8385 kB BMP Preview kscan_0001jpeg6328kB JPEG Scan Size 7 ikscan 0002jpeg 110 3kB JPEG Custom kscan O003jpeg 630kB JPEG t ikeran OMA inan 1 amp 1MR IpEC wj O nx Gallery Autoselection O active on black scanner background Threshold Scanner Settings AGFA SNAPSCAN 1236U 8 Scan mode Ea Color 5 m Selection Halftone pattern DispersedDot8x8 width 33 mm Resolution 600 H height 33 mm LEN a E sze l Final Scan JL Preview Scan J Figure 19 2 The Kooka Preview Window File Use this menu to start the KPrinter printing assistant to create a new folder for your images and to save delete and close files The OCR results of a scanned text document can be saved here Also use this menu to close Kooka Image The Image menu allows starting a graphics application for postprocess ing or optical character recognition of an image The recognized text from an OCR operation is displayed in its own frame Various tools for scaling rotating and flipping an image are available These functions can also be accesse
82. o 220 17 6 For More Information 220 uopoolddy Buluing 33 Sul AN 17 1 Creating a Data CD Creating a data CD is easy Go to File gt New Project gt New Data Project The project view appears in the lower part of the window as shown in Fig ure 17 1 Drag the desired directories or individual files from your home direc tory to the project folder and drop them there Save the project under a name of your choice with File gt Save as File Project Plugins Tools Settings Help 12421800 ESEZ RX RX bin Desktop Mail OpenOffice org1 1 Orbit tux public html Novell Fonts sxw Welcome txt O OG Q O O Fitr AtFies 117 TOSHIBA DV E Temp 28 5 GB 30 0 GB K3b CE Figure 17 1 Creating a New Data CD Then select Burn from the toolbar A dialog with five tabs offering various op tions for writing the CD opens See Figure on page 216 17 1 Creating a Data CD 17 2 Burning CDs The detected writer is displayed under Device in the burning dialog Set the burning speed in Burning Speed The following options are offered here Mode This option determines how the laser writes a CD In the DAO disk at once mode the laser is not deactivated while the CD is written This mode is recommended for the creation of audio CDs However it is not supported by all CD writers In the TAO mode track at one a
83. once to start the associated program or the file manager Konqueror If you right click an icon different menus appear depending on the program As well as the icons there are two desktop menus 1 1 1 The Desktop Menus If you middle click the desktop if your mouse only has two buttons press both buttons at the same time a window and desktop management menu is dis played The menu lists the various desktops and the windows opened in them Click one of the following menu items Unclutter Windows If you have several windows on your desktop they are placed next to each other and aligned with the top left corner Cascade Windows Starting from the top left corner the windows on the desk top are placed on top of each other in such a way that only the top and left borders of the lower windows are visible Desktop x Desktop 1 is your default desktop This part of the menu lists all the windows currently opened You can bring them to the foreground by clicking one of the respective items Additional Desktops You can use the additional virtual desktops provided and switch to them with the menu or the panel All functions are available on all desktops This limits the number of programs and associated win dows that need to be arranged on one desktop These virtual desktops re semble additional desks in your office If you right click the desktop a more complex menu is displayed allowing you to customize your desk
84. open the import utility KMail currently features import filters for Outlook Express 4 5 and 6 the mbox format simple e mail texts Pegasus Mail and Evolution folders The import utility can also be started separately by pressing Alf F2 and entering the command kmailcvt Select the corresponding application and confirm with Continue A file or a folder must be provided depending on the selected type KMail then completes the process 12 9 The Address Book Save frequently used addresses and contacts in the address book Access it from the Tools menu Create a new entry with File gt New Contact For the details of address management read Address Management with KAddressBook on page 99 12 10 Filters Filters enable the automatic processing of incoming messages However filters can also be applied to messages manually To do so highlight the messages then press or select Message gt Apply filters The filters are applied to all selected messages by matching rules All existing filter rules are applied There is no way to exclude certain filters from the action SUSE LINUX uooolddy ION Idy eur ION 141 12 10 1 Filter Rules A filter consists of one or several filter rules and filter actions A filter rule can select one or several messages according to criteria such as sender content or recipients The filter action can perform tasks like moving deleting marking or forwa
85. option is only recommended for expert users The None option completely deactivates the recording of messages It plays the welcome message then hangs up PIN Enter a personal identification number PIN for remote access A numeri cal code of any length can be entered If it is entered during playback of the welcome message the user is taken to the remote access menu The remote access feature is disabled if the field is left empty OK accepts the changes Cancel closes the dialog without applying any changes 14 2 Usage The following section briefly describes the use of the system Following a short introduction to the reception of messages with the Linux mail system a descrip tion is provided for the operation of the fax functionality and the answering ma chine 14 2 1 General Notes about Reception The development of Capisuite heavily relied on using already existing capabil ities of Linux This is why the delivery of incoming faxes and voice messages is handled by the internal Linux mail system instead of proprietary applications and protocols This requires the configuration of a mail client for receiving local messages for each user of CapiSuite If you have not disabled the sending of mail in the CapiSuite configuration you will receive all incoming voice and fax messages in your e mail program where you can view them or listen to them as usual 14 2 Usage 14 2 2 Fax Operation No further instructi
86. overdue to do items should be light red The other items of the preferences dialog allow customization of the various views and the program s group features Under Group Scheduling provide ad ditional e mail addresses which is useful if you are registered for a certain event under a different address 2 KOrganizer Main Configuration Personal C Use email settings from Control Center e Full name Anonym Email address niemand nirgendwo Time amp Date O Send copy to owner when mailing events gt j Auto Save Views R Enable automatic saving of calendar K Save interval in minutes 10 Fonts IR Confirm deletes Mail Client Colors 2 KMail C Sendmail Group Scheduling Export to HTML with every save New Events Todos Should Group Automation Q Be added to the standard resource amp Be asked which resource to use Help Defaults w ok i x Cancel Figure 6 2 Configuring KOrganizer SUSE LINUX Jeziub81Oy ui Bullnosyuos 93 94 6 3 Using the Calendar The calendar of KOrganizer can be displayed in a number of different views to show a certain month day week or work week There is also a view of the next three days Details of these views can be configured with Settings gt Configure KOrganizer under the Views item Switch between the different views with the View menu or by clicking the corresponding button i
87. page of The GIMP Grokking the GIMP by Carey Bunks is an excellent book based on an older GIMP version Although some aspects of the program have changed it can provide excellent guidance for image manipulation http gimp print sourceforge net is the web page for the GIMP print plug in The user manual available from the site provides detailed information about configuring and using the program SUSE LINUX dINID eui uu soiudoio Buyoindiuny 251 Part V Excursions Working with the Shell Graphical user interfaces are increasingly becoming important for Linux but us ing the mouse is not always the best way to perform daily tasks The command line provides high flexibility and efficiency The first part of this chapter provides an introduction to the Bash shell It is followed by an explanation of the user per missions concept in Linux and a list of the most important commands The chap ter closes with a description of the vi text editor 21 1 Introduction to Bash 256 21 2 Users and Access Permissions 265 213 Important Linux Commands 270 21 4 TheviEditorl 278 IOUS eut UM BUMIOM 256 Text based applications are especially important for controlling older Linux com puters that do not have the resources for demanding display systems Virtual consoles are used in this case Six of them are available in text mode Press Alf FD thro
88. respective parameter in the list to the left under the controller and click Clear Binding Clear All clears the entire list of MIDI controllers and bindings With Toggle MIDI Sign determine whether a parameter should increase or decrease with rising controller values The settings of these MIDI controllers become ef fective only when the current parameter value has been attained This prevents sudden parameter jolts Add to Parameter View adds the currently marked module parameter to the Parameter View dialog The parameters can be easily arranged into tabulators and labeled frames 15 11 5 The MIDI Out Module The output of the MIDI events generated by a MIDI Out module is realized by way of the two readable MIDI ports of AlsaModularSynth in the left list of ka connect If several MIDI Out modules are used simultaneously the MIDI events are merged accordingly As both notation and controller events can be sent the module can also be used to control all kinds of parameters via control voltage To SUSE LINUX ________ 203 204 MIDI Controller Parameter Module f Volume 3 Mixer 4 gt 1 type 10 channel 0 param 30 type 10 channel 0 param 31 type 10 channel 0 param 32 MES requency Poly Mvclpf type 10 channel 0 param 33 Module Parameter MIDI Sig Mixer 4 gt 1 ID 14 Poly Mvclpf 3 ID 23 Exp FM gain Frequency ainput gain dB j
89. setting for the file system is very important Choose between the Linux format ext2 and MS DOS If you select MS DOS you will be able to read and write the floppy disk on a Windows machine In the center select Quick Format or Full Format The quick format procedure merely rewrites the file system and deletes all data The full format procedure rewrites all tracks and sectors and is able to detect and mark bad sectors Sectors marked as bad are not used for writing data Select Verify Integrity to have the formatting checked and verified upon completion If you activate Volume Label designate a name for the floppy disk in the input field below After making all settings click Format You are warned that all data on the disk will be lost and prompted to confirm KFloppy informs you if any problems occur during the formatting procedure including information about any bad sectors Click Help to access a short menu that offers the KFloppy handbook Addition ally use it to send a bug report or other concerns to the developers of KFloppy Selecting About KFloppy accesses information about the version authors trans lation and license About KDE provides information about KDE and web pages of the KDE developers Exit KFloppy by clicking Quit 1 4 8 Ark Displaying Decompressing and Creating Archives To save space on the hard disk use a packer that compresses files and directo ries to a fract
90. so you may not want use it for sites with high privacy require ments such as online banking sites Window This menu lets you switch to other browser windows and to those of other Mozilla components if installed to the mail client the composer and the address book Help Mozilla is a multipurpose tool so you may want to use this menu to access the online help which provides information and hints about the features of the program 10 1 2 The Navigation Toolbar The buttons of the navigation toolbar give quick access to the basic functions of the browser Use Forward and Back to jump one step ahead or back in the his tory of pages viewed previously Reload updates the contents of a page Usually web sites are stored in the cache for a certain time in case they are called again Reload always loads the current page from the Internet Stop aborts the loading of a page so no further data is transferred from the corresponding site The next element to the right is the location bar in which to enter Internet ad dresses URLs or search terms If you enter a search term then press Search Mozilla searches the web for that term using the search engine set in the prefer ences After having visited a number of sites directly select their addresses again by clicking the down arrow which opens a drop down list Mozilla stores the contents of this list so it is available in your next browser session Start typing a
91. the screen consists of several areas By default the icon for the main menu is located to the far left Other icons are next to it The house icon provides quick access to your home directory with all subdirectories The other icons start applications such as OpenOffice org K Mail and the web browser Konqueror if these programs were installed Next to these icons are the numbered buttons with which to switch desktops These multiple desktops enable you to organize your work if you use many pro grams simultaneously as if you had several desks for various tasks The taskbar is located next to the virtual desktops All started applications are displayed in the taskbar If you click a window title in the taskbar the applica tion is moved to the foreground If it is already in the foreground clicking min imizes the application If you click it again it reopens Next to the taskbar find applets such as the clipboard Klipper SuSEwatcher and any other applets you have started The clock helps you keep track of the time If you right click an empty space in the panel a menu providing the usual help and configuration options for the panel is displayed Use the menu to change the size of the panel and to add or remove applications To add an application search for itin the menu and select it Remove applications or applets by right clicking the corresponding icon and selecting Remove from the displayed menu SUSE LINUX 11
92. to be held down even if they are only pressed once for a short time Slow Keys Here determine if and to what extent the system delays the output of characters on the screen when a key is pressed The longer the interval adjusted with the slider is the longer a key can be pressed without trigger ing a repeated output of the respective character on the screen SUSE LINUX doptseq Jay eut 19 Bounce Keys If you activate this option pressing a key twice is only interpreted as two characters if the interval selected with the slider has elapsed If a key is pressed twice inadvertently this is ignored 1 3 Konqueror as a File Manager Konqueror is a unified web browser file manager document viewer and image viewer The following paragraphs cover the use of Konqueror for file manage ment Start Konqueror by clicking the house icon in the panel The contents of your home directory are then displayed The file manager window consists of the menu bar at the top the toolbar and the location bar The lower part of the window is split vertically into the navigation panel and the main window which displays the contents Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help Qaa oO Dos ABE E gt Location B file home tux Tis Ez suse FTP Archives y Local Network 3r 5 99 web Sites ho 4 KDE Applications amp KDE Home Page bin Desktop Mail OpenOffice org1 1 KDE News 3
93. to the collection and other details xnu ui PUNOS Search This tab opens a dialog in which to perform a recursive search for a file in a given directory To do so enter a text string for the title and the location at which to start the search Then select Search and wait for the results to appear in the lower section of the window Streams This view manages Internet radio streams After making sure that you are connected to the Internet select Fetch Stream Information amaroK in cludes an entry for every reachable stream in the list below Then drag any entry from this list and drop it into the playlist to listen to the broadcast Effects Select the FX button in the player window or use the amaroK application menu to open a dialog in which to enable and configure several sound effects such as an equalizer the stereo balance and a hall effect Select the desired effects and adjust the settings if available for each of them Visualizations amarok comes with a number of visualizations that display a graphical effect for the music played Native amaroK visualizations are displayed in the player window Cycle through the various available display modes by clicking the ani mation In addition to the above amaroK also supports the visualization plug ins of the XMMS media player To use these first install the xmms plugins package then select Visualizations from the amaroK menu This opens a window listing the
94. to your own preferences Some people work with the mouse from the hand joint Others prefer moving their complete forearm An alternative to the mouse is a trackball Here you move a ball inside a stationary casing to control the mouse pointer In contrast to the mouse the trackball reduces the movements in the hand and arm area 22 3 Links and Literature A great manual for staff members and superiors with many checklists and ques tionnaires that also take the mental strain into account Burmester M G rner C SUSE LINUX 92DJ O 10M SUI ui SOILIOUOBIJ 291 292 Hacker W Karcher M and others 1997 The SANUS Manual EU compliant Screen Work research FB 760 Berlin Series of the Federal Office for Work Protection and Work Medicine SANUS Safety and health protection for termi nal work on the basis of international standards A clear and well structured guide for analysis and work protection tasks around the terminal workstation Richenhagen G Pr mper J amp Wagner J 1998 2nd edition Handbuch der Bildschirmarbeit trans Manual of terminal work Neuwied Luchterhand Information Network of the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work Available in many languages comprehensive information http europe osha eu int 22 3 Links and Literature Help and Documentation The SUSE Help Center provides central access to the most important documen tation resources on your system in searc
95. type followed by a colon the card number and the device number for example plughw 0 0 The dmi x output plug in is a recent addition to the PCM types It allows appli cations to share access to a PCM device on sound cards that do not support this natively The complete identifier in this case is plug dmix More information about dmix can be found athttp alsa opensrc org index php page DmixPlugin 15 2 Mixers Mixers provide a convenient means of controlling the volume and balance of the sound output and input of computers The main difference between the vari ous mixers consists in the outer appearance of the user interface However there are a number of mixers that are designed for specific hardware One example is envy24control a mixer for the Envy 24 sound chip Another one is hdspmixer which is for RME Hammerfall cards From the mixers available select the one that best suits your needs 15 1 The ALSA PCM Types Note Generally it is advisable to open a mixer application prior to opening other sound applications Use the mixer to test and adjust the control settings for the input and output of the sound card Some sound cards may not allow simultaneous access from multiple applications If a sound application freezes this might be the cause Note xnu ui punog 15 2 1 gamix If you have multiple sound cards gamix provides a set of controllers for each card Slide the control sliders to set the level
96. usual When you move the cursor while painting the source point marked by a cross moves as well If the Align ment is set to Non Aligned the default setting the source resets to the original when you release the left mouse button 20 5 4 Adjusting Color Levels Images often need a little adjusting to get ideal print or display results In many programs designed for inexperienced users the brightness and contrast levels are modified This can work and is also available in The GIMP but better results can be obtained by adjusting the color levels To do this select Layer gt Colors gt Levels A dialog opens for controlling the levels in the image Good results can usually be obtained by clicking Auto To SUSE LINUX AINID eu ui soyda Buyoindiuny 247 248 make manual adjustments to all channels use the dropper tools in All Channels to pick black gray and white points from the image itself To modify a channel individually select the desired channel in Modify Levels for Channel Then drag the black white and middle markers in the slider in In put Levels Alternatively use the dropper tools to select points in the image that should serve as the white black and gray points for that channel If Preview is checked the image window shows a preview of how the image would look with the modifications applied When the desired result is achieved press OK to apply the changes
97. would read B3 B4 B5 D3 D4 D5 3 6 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc 3 6 3 Creating Charts Now add some more entries to the spreadsheet for instance by including some more months in row 2 After doing so the table could look like Figure 3 9 Figure 3 9 Expanded Example Spreadsheet Select the range from A2 to E5 The text appears white on black To create a chart select Insert gt Chart This opens a dialog window The first page in this dialog gives the option to modify the original cell selection and to specify whether to use the first row or column as chart labels Usually the set tings on this page can be accepted without change Continue by clicking Next The dialog consists of four pages The main page shows the available chart types The types offered include line area column and bar charts To the left the page displays a preview of your data according to the type selected The most suitable type for this example is the line chart Click Next to proceed to a page in which to choose from different variants of line charts with or without symbols stacked percent cubic spline and so on For the current example select Symbols If you enable Show text elements in preview the column headers Zanuary February etc are displayed on the X axis and the numerical values on the Y axis Also a chart legend is added on the right hand side On the next page give the chart
98. you are finished composing your message you can either send it imme diately Message gt Send or move it to the outbox If you do the former the message is copied to sent mail after having been sent successfully If you do the latter it is moved to the outbox You can edit any message in the outbox using the Edit main menu or delete it 12 7 Message Folders Message folders help to organize your messages By default they are located in the directory Mail When starting KMail for the first time the program creates the folders inbox outbox sent mail and trash automatically The function of these folders is as follows inbox KMail stores all newly retrieved messages in this folder unless a filter has been defined outbox Contains the messages waiting to be sent sent mail Contains copies of all e mails that have been sent trash Contains copies of all e mails deleted with or Edit Delete If you want additional folders to organize your messages create them by select ing Folder gt New Folder This opens a window in which to specify options for the folder under the General tab See Figure on the next page Enter a name for the folder and select a parent folder in Belongs to if the new folder should be created as a subfolder SUSE LINUX uoupoliddy ION Idy eur ION 139 140 r Folder Position Name Belongs to Top Level y r Folder Icons EJ
99. you can change between sitting and standing by turning the table into a writing stand often just at the push of a button are a luxury but changing be tween a sitting and standing position brings relief a The flexible arrangement of working materials requires a table top of at least 160 x 80 cm Workstations made of several interlinked boards are recommended Tables that cannot be vertically adjusted must be 72 cm high Tables that are vertically adjustable must be between 68 and 76 cm high Even more width is needed for certain working tasks such as CAD work stations When changing between screen work and other kinds of work at least 200 cm is required 22 1 The Working Environment There should be at least 60 cm leg room Previous experience has shown however that this leg room is often too little When using large screens tables should be 100 or even 120 cm deep The table surface should not be in bright colors and should have minimal reflection A lot of office furniture is available in a subdued grey only 22 1 2 Sitting Correctly on the Right Working Chair Sitting in a working chair makes you sit in the same posture for a long time un like in an easy chair where you can move around easily Constant sitting in the wrong position such as bending forward or twisting to the side can harm the respiratory and digestive organs This leads to premature fatigue circulatory disturbances and backache resulting
100. 0LYMP 5 n P8280005 Figure 18 1 The Main Window of gtKam Connect your camera to the appropriate port and turn on the camera Start gtKam with the command gtkam From the menu select Camera Select Camera In the dialog that opens select the camera model or use Detect Se lect the appropriate port if the detection fails The main gtKam window is divided into three sections the menu and toolbars the left pane with index settings and camera and directory selection and the right pane for displaying an index listing with or without thumbnails The icons in the toolbar provide the main functions needed The disk icon saves the selected im ages The trash icon deletes them The icon with the arrows loads the image index displayed in the right pane The icon with the paper and pencil opens the camera configuration options The door icon exits the program Your camera should be listed in the left pane Use the plus sign to the left to expand the tree display of the directory structure Your exact directory structure depends on the camera type and model Continue expanding until you reach the entries that cannot be expanded These are the index listings of the pictures Click an item to select it If View Thumbnails is activated the picture names and thumbnails are displayed in the right window pane Otherwise the names and an icon are displayed SUSE LINUX xnu PUD SOIOLUDD JOLIBIG
101. 162 Capisuite is a daemon a program that runs in the background that provides basic telecommunication functions The current version mainly offers functions for telephone and fax connections For example the system supports the establishment and termination of incoming and outgoing fax and voice connections Fax and audio files can then be sent and received over these connections Some special functions like the switching of a phone connection to a fax connection and the processing of DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency common touchtone phone tones are supported However the system does not constitute a complete application suite for cer tain tasks such as an answering machine application The actual application was written in the Python scripting language a language especially suitable for be ginners and can thus be freely adjusted to the your requirements Capisuite merely processes the provided scripts and executes the specified commands This allows the creation of flexible solutions from a simple answering machine or fax program to a small call center for which the system is still lacking some basic features The CapiSuite package includes some ready made scripts that enable a comfort able multiuser answering machine and fax solution The following pages refer to the use of these scripts Following the installation details on the system as well as instructions for writing custom scripts are available in usr share doc packag
102. 223 Images in the right pane can be selected or deselected by clicking them Select all images with Select All or Shiff A To save the selected images use the disk icon in the toolbar select File gt Save Selected Photos or use the shortcut Cit The Save dialog shown in Figure 18 2 has a number of options Under What to Save select whether to save the thumbnails the images or both With Open image s with save the image and open it in another program To open the images in The GIMP immediately enter gimp Using the file names suggested by the camera is recommended Create Dir Delete File Rename File home geeko 1 Directories i Desktop Documents public html What to save r Save photos Save audio data Save thumbnails Open image s with F Use filenames provided by the camera Filename prefix Selection home geeko OK Cancel Figure 18 2 Saving Images 18 5 Using Digikam Digikam by Renchi Raju is a KDE program for downloading photographs from digital cameras On start up Digikam presents a window with three sections 224 18 5 Using Digikam your home directory is displayed to the left the photographs available in the camera are displayed to the right and a list of cameras is displayed below To set up a camera in Digikam select Configure gt Setup A window display ing a list of supported cameras
103. 3 The Print Dialog you set an appropriate print size and resolution in the image Adjust the image s position on the page with the fields in Position or by dragging the image in Pre view When satisfied with the settings press Print To save the settings for future use instead use Print and Save Settings Cancel aborts printing 250 J 20 7 Printing Images 20 8 Configuring GIMP 20 8 1 Customizing Windows It is possible to customize your window layout extensively Dialogs can be com bined as multiple items in one window or with tabs Do this by dragging and dropping a dockable window into a dock bar or existing tab New dialogs can be opened with File gt Dialogs from the toolbox 20 8 2 Setting Preferences A number of configuration options are available in File gt Preferences The de fault settings should meet the needs of the average user It may be useful how ever to review the options under Environment Resource Levels and Inter face gt Image Windows 20 9 For More Information The following are some resources that may be useful for the GIMP user Unfortu nately the newness of this version means that many resources may be outdated Help provides access to the internal help system The GIMP User Group offers an informative and interesting web site at http gug sunsite dk http www gimp orgis the official home
104. 456 capisuitefax d 089123456 documentl ps document2 ps capisuitefax converts the documents to the correct format and stores them to gether with a description file in a special folder from which they are then fetched and sent by CapisSuite There can be a short delay between the execution of the command and the actual sending The user is notified by e mail when a fax mes sage has been successfully sent or after the failure of a set number of attempts In the standard desktop KDE fax messages can easily be sent from any KDE ap plication with the help of the KDEPrintFax utility Configure KDEPrintFax as fol lows SUSE LINUX UoinpoolunuJuJoo2e 9 NASI 169 170 Start KDEPrintFax This can be done by pressing and entering kdeprintfax Select Settings gt Configure KDEPrintFax Click the System icon in the left pane As capisuitefax is largely compatible with the HylaFAX suite select Hy laFAX under Fax system Set Command to usr bin capisuitefax d number files Finish the configuration by clicking OK and closing KDEPrintFax File Fax Settings Help Fax system selection Personal C Use EFax system Use HylaFax system usr bin capisuitefax d number 9efiles Enterprise iil Comment de Hylafax Figure 14 5 Configuring CapiSuite in KDEPrintFax 14 2 Usage Send to Fax is then available in the Print menu of
105. 5 Inserting a Table Create a table by clicking the Insert icon in the main toolbar and keeping it pressed for a few seconds This opens another toolbar in which to specify the ob ject to insert If you now move the mouse cursor to the third icon a grid opens as shown in FigureB 6 pp etault m thorndale E Figure 3 6 Inserting a Table Using the Toolbar If your table should have two columns and two rows for example just run the mouse over that range of columns and rows to select them from the grid When you release the button the table is inserted into the document at the current text cursor position Note The Insert icon changes depending on the last object selected for in sertion This also means that you can now insert a table again with just a short click without any need to reopen the pop up toolbar Note SUSE LINUX SLINS eoyo 610 eoyjouedo SU 67 68 3 5 6 Inserting Graphics Graphics can be inserted with the same pop up toolbar as tables only you need to select its second button Alternatively select Insert gt Graphics gt From File This opens a dialog window in which to select the desired file If you check Preview the selected image is displayed in the right part of the dialog The preview may take some time in the case of larger images After confirming your choice the inserted image is placed in the document at the cursor position In the do
106. 7 The Settings Menu Synchronizing a Handheld Computer with KPilot Handheld computers are in widespread use among users who need to have their schedules to do lists and notes with them everywhere they go Often users want the same data to be available both on the desktop and on the portable de vice This is where KPilot comes in it is a tool to synchronize data on a hand held with that used by the KDE applications KAddressBook KOrganizer and KNotes 51 How KPilot Works 0 0 00 84 5 2 Conduits Used by KPilot 84 53 Working with KPilotl 88 JO ldM ULM JOLNAWOD pjeupupH p Guiziuoju2uAS 84 5 1 How KPilot Works The main purpose of KPilot is to allow the sharing of data between the applica tions of a handheld computer and their KDE counterparts KPilot does come with its own built in memo viewer address viewer and file installer but these cannot be used outside the KPilot environment Independent KDE applications are avail able for all these functions except the file installer For communication between the handheld and the different desktop programs KPilot relies on conduits KPilot itself is the program that oversees any data ex change between the two computer devices Using a particular function of the handheld on your desktop computer requires that the corresponding conduit is enabled and configured For the most part these conduits are designed to interact wit
107. A detailed explanation is displayed if you click the symbol in the title bar then the respective menu item Other This tab features the setting for the default paper format and measure ments On a US system the default paper format is US Letter and the im perial system is used for measurements Accessibility The settings in this module facilitate access to the system for users with hearing problems or motor disorders This module contains the Bell and Keyboard tabs Audible Bell System bells can be communicated to the user in a visible or in an audible form The default setting is the audible variant with Use System bell To configure a specific sound activate Use customized bell and use Browse to select a suitable sound from the list Visible Bell For system bells to be communicated visually activate Use visible bell If no other modifications are performed the screen is inverted when a system bell rings Invert screen is activated by default The duration of the visual bell can be adjusted with the slider Instead of the inversion the screen can be set to flash To do this activate Flash screen and select a suitable color in the color editor by clicking the color bar Sticky Keys Some shortcuts require a key to be held down this is the case with AID Ctr and Shiff while the second part of the shortcut is entered If sticky keys are enabled the system considers these keys
108. Bookmarks opens the book mark editor in which to perform tasks like deleting obsolete bookmarks renaming bookmarks and moving bookmarks from one folder to another Extra This menu includes entries for a variety of items such as Run Com mand Open Terminal Window and Search for Files You can use Filter View to limit the view to certain types of files For example one of your di rectories may hold graphics files of different formats but you only want to see those in PNG format You could then use this submenu item to hide all files that are not in PNG format Selecting Create Image Gallery causes Konqueror to search the directory for any image files The program then creates thumbnail pictures of them and combines these into an HTML page A dialog box prompts you to set the options for the HTML page such as the font and the number of thumb nails per line Settings Use the Settings menu to configure the look and feel of Konqueror If you do not want a menu select Hide Menubar Press CMM to display it again The Toolbars submenu allows you to hide or display other ele ments of the file manager View profiles can be used to change the view according to predefined us age patterns To switch between the available profiles select Load View Profile One of the profiles is the web browser profile which is used auto matically when you click the Konqueror icon in the panel Add y
109. D Headline Prefix Only for users behind a PBX Enter the prefix number for getting a public line This number will be dialed before any destination number When adding or editing a user a dialog will be shown with the following fields User The system user to which this fax account belongs Prefix Fax Numbers The numbers separated by commas on which faxes should be received for this user If you enter the user gets any H Abort Back Figure 14 1 YaST Module for the Configuration of the Fax Function Fax Numbers Phone numbers assigned to the user for incoming fax messages are entered in this field Separate multiple phone numbers with commas All faxes sent to these numbers will be forwarded to the user by e mail Leave this field empty if you only want the user to be able to send fax mes sages StationID For identification purposes the fax protocol uses a special ID that should normally contain the external phone number of the fax device in in ternational notation An example for a valid station ID is 1 305 123456 for the fax number 123456 in Miami Florida The maximum length of this entry is twenty digits Valid characters are numbers spaces and the sym bol as prefix to the international country code Header This field can contain an arbitrary text to use as a header for sent faxes Whether and how this text is featured on the sent document depends on the ISDN d
110. G I LIE n ACME IAN I E gg PCM Wav Music bb gb gl gl gb gg gg gg g5 FEE b llo LETS E Se TST IOs TOUT Bey m E 9 DL LET UTI TU IR ET EST TIR Surround Digital Wave Surround Center LFE Wave Center Wave LFE R Lock R Lock R Lock Xj Lock me i Lock Ij Lock Figure 15 2 The Mixer QAmix 15 2 3 KMix KMix is the KDE mixer It provides a convenient and familiar interface for KDE users It can also be integrated into the KDE panel 15 2 4 The GNOME Mixer Applet If you use GNOME the GNOME Mixer applet can be added to the panel for con venient volume control Simply right click the panel then select Add to Panel gt Multimedia gt Volume Control Right click the volume control applet then select Run Volume Control to access the more advanced mixer functions 15 2 5 alsamixer alsamixer can be run from the command line without the X environment The application is operated with the cursor keys Use 9 W O 0 and C to set different levels for the left and right channels M mutes single channels In this 15 2 Mixers case MM appears above the muted controller To terminate alsamixer press Esc The basic controls for sound output are Master PCM and CD Master sets the master volume PCM and CD control the respective weighting of the PCM and audio CD channels Determine the recording source by pre
111. Internet Keywords 109 8 4 Bookmarks o o 109 85 Java and JavaScript o o 110 8 6 ForMore Information 00 4 110 JOJONOUOY JOSMOIG geM SUL 8 1 Starting Konqueror and Opening Web Pages Start Konqueror from the main menu or by entering the command konqueror To load a web page enter its address in the location bar for example http www suse de Konqueror now tries to reach the address and display the page Entering the protocol at the beginning of the address http in this case is not strictly required The program is able to complete the address auto matically but this only works reliably with web addresses For an FTP address always enter ftp at the beginning of the input field Dokument Bearbeiten Ansicht Gehezu Lesezeichen Extras Einstellungen Fenster Hilfe Poe LD QQ o0 OG ASRA aa E E gt Adresse e http www suse de en gt Fe B3 suse e At Last Communication without Limits NEW SUSE LINUX Openexchange Server 4 1 Business Customers Home Users Partners About SUSE gf Modern enterprises need Your PC has more to offer Linux offers perspectives SUSE LINUX more than big names and than the market leading Secure your share inone headquartered in the treacherous security operating system reveals ofthe IT markets of Nuremberg Germany is that conventional more stability more tomorrow wi
112. Layers dialog to view the available layers of an image The text tool au tomatically creates special text layers when used The active layer is highlighted The buttons at the bottom of the dialog offer a number of functions More are available in the menu opened when a layer is right clicked in the dialog The two icon spaces before the image name are used for toggling image visibility eye icon when visible and for linking layers Linked layers are marked with the chain icon and moved as a group Only layers with transparency an alpha channel can be placed above other lay ers in a stack To add this to a layer right click and select it from the menu 20 6 2 Image Modes GIMP has three image modes RGB Grayscale and Indexed RGB is a normal color mode and is the best mode for editing most images Grayscale is used for black and white images Indexed limits the colors in the image to a set number It is mainly used for GIF images If you need an indexed image it is normally best to edit the image in RGB then convert to indexed right before saving If you save to a format that requires an indexed image GIMP offers to index the image when saving 20 6 3 Special Effects The GIMP includes a wide range of filters and scripts for adding special effects to an image or making artistic manipulations They are available in Filters and Script fu Experimenting is the best way to find out what is available Xtns in the toolbox i
113. M anduon PISUpubH o BulzluOlyou s 85 Configuring the Connection from within KPilot The easiest way to set up the connection is by using the configuration assistant Select Settings gt Configuration Assistant to start the assistant In the first step enter your user name and the name of the device to which the handheld is connected The assistant attempts to detect them itself if you select Autodetect Handheld amp User Name If the autodetection fails refer to Creating a dev pilot Link on this page After confirming with Next the assistant prompts you to specify the applica tions that should be used for synchronization You can choose among the KDE application suite default Evolution and none After selecting close the window with Finish Creating a dev pilot Link The setup of the connection with a serial handheld cradle is different from that of a USB cradle Depending on which cradle is used you may or may not need to create a symbolic link named dev pilot USB Normally a USB cradle is autodetected and there should be no need to cre ate the symbolic link mentioned Serial With a serial cradle you need to know to which serial port itis actually connected Serial devices are named dev ttyS starting from dev ttySO for the first port To set up a cradle connected to the first serial port enter the command ln s dev ttyS0 dev pilot 5 2 2 Configuring the KAddressBook Condui
114. OK when the correct folder is selected When finished creating the filter click OK SUSE LINUX WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD pub ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 155 156 Rule name Untitled If Add criterion Execute actions if all criteria are met v Sender X contains X dy Remove Then dy Add action f Move to Folder v click here to select a folder di Remove Box 3t cancer Figure 13 2 Setting up a Filter Creating a Filter from a Message Select the message on which to base the filter Right click and select Create Rule From Message Select the desired filter option This opens the filter creation di alog with the correct criteria already selected Add additional criteria if desired Select the appropriate filter action Click OK when finished Applying Filters Filters are applied in the order listed in the dialog accessed with Tools Fil ters Change the order by highlighting a filter and clicking Up or Down Click OK to close the filter dialog when finished Filters are applied to all new mail messages They are not applied to mail already in your folders To apply filters to messages already received select the desired messages then select Actions gt Apply Filters 13 4 7 Virtual Folders VFolders are a unique feature of Evolution A VFolder is
115. SuSE The patchbay QJackConnect assists in tracking the JACK clients running in your system Following the program launch with qjackconnect the clients with readable ports are listed on the left side and the clients with writable ports are listed on the right side If no JACK clients were started the lists initially only display the inputs and outputs of the sound card The lists are updated automat ically as the port configuration changes The ports are displayed in a tree view under the client Connect individual ports by selecting them from the lists and clicking Connect Connect multiple ports simultaneously by selecting clients 15 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity With audacity package audacity record and edit audio files This is called hard disk recording When you start the program for the first time select a lan guage At other times change the language setting under File gt Preferences gt Interface The language change is then effective the next time you start the program 15 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity File Edit View Project Generate Effect Analyze Help xnu ui PUNOS Project rate 44100 Selection 0 58 735329 1 08 038124 0 09 302795 min sec Snap To Off Figure 15 8 Spectral View of the Audio Data 15 6 1 Recording WAV Files and Importing Files Click the red recording button to generate an empty stereo track and start the recording To change the stan
116. UIBDUDIA SSSIPPY 101 102 File Edit View Tools Settings Help AASB ej 34M x Search An Fielas Eiter None zj oO Tux Pinguin Given Name Family Name Email Address Freunde New List Rename List Remove List Name Email Use Preferred Home Postfach 99999 Tux Pinguin tux example com Yes Aut der Scholle 12345 Gr nland Add Contact l JL J Antarktis Figure 7 3 Editing Distribution Lists 7 4 Searching Address Data Basically KAddressBook offers three options for searching address data Searching the Local Database In the main window to select the search criterion Given Name Family Name or Email Address As soon as you enter a character string in the adjacent input field the program starts searching your data by the selected criterion The search result is displayed both in the overview and in the detailed view Searching for Initials or Numbers Jump Bar Activate this toolbar with Settings gt Show Jump Bar Depending on the activated search criterion in the Incremental search clicking the respective letter or number lists the contact entries whose names family names or e mail addresses begin with this letter or number Searching Remote Resources LDAP IMAP etc Unless you have already done so first make sure that resources are included in the search by clicking Add This opens a dialog in which to se
117. UX provides various fonts commonly available in different file formats Bitmap TrueType etc These are commonly known as System Fonts Users can additionally install their own fonts from various collections on CD ROM Such user installed fonts are however only visible and available to the corresponding user The KDE control center provides a comfortable tool for administering system and user fonts It is shown in Figure 1 13 amp Font Installer Q9 ig 2v X Location fonts Personal Name vw Font Novell Sans Bold IF NOVEL EB ttf W Novell Sans ExtraBold TNOVELSBO W Novel Sans BoldOSF The quick brown fox jump IFINOVELSBS ttf W Novell Sans BoldSC IUNOVELS BH W Novell Sans ExtraBoldOSF s over the lazy dog EY NOVELSB_ttf Novell Sans Bold meer memos t 9680 0123456789 lt gt MINOVELSD_t1 W Novell Sans Demi ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU cies WN Ba EC VWXYZ J abcdefghijkimnopq T NOVELSIS ttt W Novell Sans ItalicSC rstuvwxyz AACENOU aaaaaac E NOVELSI tf W Novell Sans Italic ee rniinooo T c 5 TIRO EINOVELSMO tff W Novell Sans MediumOSF pa Ez TM 303g T NOVELSMS tf W Novell Sans MediumSC z EOco ts2Ypy0XITRn feo Y IIINOVELSM ti W Novell Sans Medium A z AA0 Ec oy Y ofifl 36 Items 36 Fonts 1 4 MB Total 0 Folders Administrator Mode Figure 1 13 Font Administration from the Control Center To check
118. Unlimited doptseq 3d eut Figure 1 5 Monitoring Print Jobs with KJobViewer If for example you want to check if you sent the correct document to the printer you can stop the job and resume it if you decide to print it Remove your own print jobs from the queue with Remove To change the printer select a different printer with Move to Printer With Restart reprint a document To do this select Toggle Completed Jobs from the Filter menu select the desired document and click Restart in the Jobs menu Job IPP Report contains the technical details of a job Use In crease Priority and Decrease Priority to set the priority depending on how quickly you need the document Filter enables you to switch between various printers toggle completed jobs and limit the view to your own print jobs by selecting Show Only User Jobs The current user is then displayed in the top right field Settings gt Configure KJobViewer opens a configuration dialog Here deter mine the maximum number of print jobs to display Enter a number in the field or use the slider to the right to determine a value Press OK to save the setting or Cancel to exit the dialog without saving The icons in the toolbar correspond to the functions you can access by way of the menu A help text explaining the function is displayed when you move the mouse pointer over one of the icons
119. X ________ 263 264 Change to the directory with cd test2 A compressed archive with the tar gz extension can be unzipped with the gunzip command Enter gunzip testarchive tar gz which results in the file testarchive tar which then needs to be extracted or untarred with tar xvf testarchive tar You can also unzip and extract a compressed archive in one step by adding the z op tion The complete command would be tar xzvf testarchive tar gz With 1s you can see that a new test directory has been created with the same contents as your test directory in your home directory 21 1 9 mtools mtools are a set of commands for working with MS DOS file systems The com mands included in mt oo1s allow you to address the first floppy drive as a just like under MS DOS and the commands are like MS DOS commands except they are prefixed with an m mdir a displays the contents of the floppy disk in drive a mcopy Testfile a copies the file Test file to the floppy disk mdel a Testfile deletes Testfileina mformat a formats the floppy disk in MS DOS format using the fdformat command mcd a makes a your current directory mmd a test creates the subdirectory test on the floppy disk mrd a test deletes the subdirectory test from the floppy disk 21 1 10 Cleaning Up After this crash course you should be familiar with the basics of the Linux shell or command line You may want to clean up your home directory by deleting the various test
120. a virtual folder that dis plays messages based on search or filter criteria Rather than moving the mes 13 4 E Mail sages into a folder messages shown in a virtual folder remain in their original folder Actions are applied to the message in the original folder VFolders are a useful means of reading new mail in one place after it has been sorted into a number of different folders with filters For example a VFolder could be created to search all your folders for unread e mail To create a new virtual folder select Tools gt Virtual Folder Editor In the di alog click Add Like filters virtual folders can also be created from e mail mes sages Right click the e mail message select Create Rule from Message and de fine the desired criteria Enter a Rule Name For the new mail example mentioned above set the crite rion to Status is not Read Set the sources as desired Other VFolder searches can be set similarly Click OK when finished This returns to the virtual folder list The order can be changed if desired Click OK to close it The new VFolder is in the folder list under VFolders You can read answer and delete e mail with the VFolder However deleting the message deletes it from the real folder in which it is stored not just the VFolder 13 5 Calendar 13 5 1 Adding Appointments To add a new appointment to your calendar click New Appointment U
121. abits Enable Slow Keys To prevent accidental typing set a minimum time limit that a key must be pressed and held before it is recognized as valid input by the system Also determine whether audible feedback should be provided for keypress events accepted keypresses and the rejection of a keypress Enable Bounce Keys To prevent double typing set a minimum time limit for ac cepting two subsequent keypress events of the same key as the input of two individual characters If desired activate audible feedback upon rejection of a keypress event Toggle Keys Itis possible to request audible feedback from the system when a keycap modifier key is pressed Mouse Activates the keyboard mouse the mouse pointer is controlled with the arrow keys of the number pad Use the sliders to set the maximum speed of the mouse pointer the acceleration time until the maximum speed is reached and the latency between the pressing of a key and the cursor movement 2 2 Settings 2 2 10 Keyboard Shortcuts Use this module to manage global keyboard combinations It is possible to deter mine the keyboard combinations to use during text input and those for objects on the desktop The list overview window displays a list of all currently available actions along with their keyboard shortcuts Deactivate or change a keyboard shortcut by click ing the corresponding shortcut entry Then enter a new shortcut or delete the cur rent one with Delete All change
122. ably too short Ask the dealer to give you an exten sion Evaluate your own mouse use Can you reduce the use of the mouse Many professional programs with a lot of interaction do without any mouse clicks Learn how to use shortcuts to operate programs It takes time to learn but you can work up to four times as fast Often a combination of mouse and keyboard operation is recommended The ergonomic mouse feels good in your hand The keys should not be too close or too small There are even mice for children s hands Your fingers should be able to rest on the keys in a relaxed position The mouse should be next to the keyboard Left handed users have an ad vantage because the keyboard has several function keys and the numerical key block between letter keys and a mouse on the right side These extend the gripping distance If you are left handed get a mouse for left handers The cable should be long enough If necessary purchase an extension A wireless mouse is a luxury The mouse needs a proper base to function well Get a good mouse pad Pay attention to the mouse driver Good mice have mouse drivers with a multitude of functions You can for example adjust the cursor movement exactly according to your requirements or assign special instructions to the different mouse buttons The double click might be placed on the middle button with the mouse driver Make sure you adjust the acceleration and double click adjustment of the mouse
123. age in another view Adjust the magnification level of the current window with Zoom When Shrink Wrap is selected the image window is resized to fit the current image display exactly 20 4 Saving Images No image function is as important as File gt Save It is better to save too often than too rarely Use File gt Save as to save the image with a new file name It 20 4 Saving Images is a good idea to save image stages under different names or make backups in another directory so you can easily restore a previous state When saving for the first time or using Save as a dialog opens in which to specify the file name and type The current directory in shown in a box centered above the two columns Select another directory by double clicking it in Folders To save the image as an existing file select it in Files Otherwise enter a new name in the field at the bottom It is recommended to leave Determine File Type set to By Extension With that setting GIMP determines the file type based on the extension appended to the file name The following file types are frequently useful XCF This is the native format of The GIMP It saves all layer and path informa tion along with the image itself Even if you need an image in another for mat it is usually a good idea to save a copy as XCF to simplify future modi fications Information about layers is available in Layers on page PAT This is th
124. ake changes or mark it as completed 13 6 Contacts 13 6 1 Adding Contacts Along with the name and e mail address Evolution can store other address and contact information about a person The e mail address of a sender can quickly be added by right clicking the marked address in the message preview Select Add to Contacts and confirm the inclusion in the following pop up To enter more in formation click Edit Full to open the contact editor Otherwise click OK If you have selected Edit Full click Save and Close to exit the contact editor when you are finished To enter a completely new contact click New Contact in the Contacts view Enter all desired contact information Click Save and Close when finished 13 6 2 Making a List If you frequently send e mail messages to a group of people make this easier by creating a list Click New Contact List in the Contacts view The contact list editor opens Enter a name for the list Add addresses by typing the address in the box and clicking Add or by dragging contacts from the Contacts view and dropping them in the box Toggle Hide addresses to select whether the recipi ents can see who else has received the mail Click Save and Close when finished The list is now one of your contacts and appears in the composition window after the first few letters are typed 13 6 Contacts 13 6 3 Sharing Contacts To send conta
125. allow switching between them The left frame provides the gallery This is a small file browser for accessing the scanned images The frame to the lower right is shared by the OCR optical character recognition and the thumbnails which can be loaded into the image viewer with a simple click of the mouse See Fig ure on the facing page Selecting Show Scan Parameters in the Tool Views subentry of the Settings menu creates a third tab labeled Scan Parameter next to the already existing Im age Viewer and Scan Preview tabs in the main window This is where the actual scanning parameters are set 19 2 The Preview A preview should always be created when the object to scan is smaller than the total scanning area Set a few parameters to the left of the preview frame Se lect the scanning size with Custom or one of the standard formats See Fig ure 19 2 on page 230 The Custom setting is the most flexible because it allows selection of the desired area with the mouse Once the settings have been made request the preview of the image to scan by clicking Preview Scan on Scan Pa rameter 19 3 The Final Scan If you selected Custom for the scanning size use the mouse to select the rectan gular area to scan The selected area is confined by a dotted border 19 1 The Kooka Window File Image Settings Help C REA ISOLE Y E
126. am is already in the foreground a mouse click minimizes it Clicking a minimized application reopens the respective window Beside the taskbar the Workspace Switcher provides access to additional work areas These virtual desktops provide extra space in which to arrange open appli cations and windows For example put an editor on one workspace some shells on another and your e mail application and web browser on a third If you right click an empty spot in the panel a menu opens offering help infor mation and commands for GNOME and panels Select Properties to open a con figuration dialog in which to change the position and background of the panel If desired create additional panels or add launchers tools and various applets to the existing panels with Add to Panel Use drawers to organize your favorite applications or important documents The contents are only displayed when the drawer is opened with a single click Right click the drawer and select Proper ties to modify its size and appearance Click the icon to change it Remove panel elements by right clicking the respective icons and selecting Remove 2 1 4 The Main Menu Open the main menu by means of the icon to the far left of the panel Apart from the applications which are organized in categories find default functions such as Log out and Lock screen Use Open Recent to gain quick access to recent files Use Search for Files to find files Wi
127. ame navigation functionality Right click a folder and select Open in File Browser SUSE LINUX doptsed JWONSD SUL 49 50 File Edit View Go Bookmarks Help edi Back Forward Up Stop Reload Home Location ome geeko 2 View as Icons Documents nsmail public html 1 item O items 0 items Hello Wi 9 S RPM hvaes jpg proofed tar gz sample txt suse gnome theme 109 6K 448K 13 bytes 0 2 184 rpm 48 7K titlebar sh 334 bytes Figure 2 1 Nautilus Standard Window The standard window is shown in FigureP 1 Use the icons in the toolbar to move forward and backward to move one level up in the directory tree to stop loading a document to reload the document or to go to the preferred starting page Lo cation shows the path to the current directory or to the current file A different path can be directly entered here Notes is useful for managing personal infor mation about objects These notes are saved along with the object Nautilus tries to select appropriate icons for objects according to their associated file information Image and text files are shown as a thumbnail Double clicking shows the file in a viewer 2 3 2 File Management Nautilus supports dragging and dropping for managing files To move files from one directory to another use New Window from the context menu or the File menu in Nautilus to open two windows Access the path of the original location of th
128. and Harpoon Ma Sonny Boy Williamson Your Fune Sonny Blake Bugle Call Blues Paul Orta Wailing At Weavers Paul Lamb You Sure Make Loving Red Alabama Train Blues Harp Blues Harp Blues Harp Blues Harp Blues Harp Blues Harp Blues Harp Album 25 Years Of Harp 25 Years Of Harp 25 Years Of Harp 25 Years Of Harp 25 Years Of Harp 25 Years Of Harp 25 Years Of Harp Harp X D O lection H P Big Joe Turner 25 Years Of Harp 25 Years Of Harp zi i Little Walter Walter s Jump Blues Harp Billie Holiday zi King Biscuit Boy I ve Done Eve Blues Harp 9 Ata Media d 2 E coca 3 Menu ummm 80 22Tracks FA mmi Blues Harp Louisiana Red Alabama Train 3 21 gdancer so a Train 25 Years Of Harp 3 21 Blues Harp L libblursk so 0 02 08 112 kbps 44100 Hz libbscopemax so libbs o libfinespectrum so PE PX T libfishmatic so libgeekosphere so libgefx so libgforce so libgoom so libinfinite so libiris so libjakdaw so gt T nine n Figure 15 4 The amaroK Media Player Playlists The right part of the playlist window contains the currently loaded playlist Play titles listed in it in the order of your choice Initially the list is empty so you need to create one The best way to do this is by using the sidebar to the left of the win dow To the very left there are a number of tabs that can be used to open
129. and updated by clicking Set tings gt Save settings Here the broadcasters are saved along with the configuration More information about the configuration file can be found in the man page for xawtvrc Note 16 1 4 The Launcher Menu Use the launcher menu to start other applications to use with motv Start the au dio mixer gamix and the video text application alevt for example using a key SUSE LINUX 209 210 board shortcut Applications to launch from motv must be entered in the xawtv file The entries should look like this launch Gamix Ctrl G gamix AleVT Ctrl A alevt The shortcut then the command used to start the application should follow the application name itself Start the applications entered under launch via the Tool menu 16 2 Video Text with alevt Use alevt to browse video text pages Start the application via SUSE gt Multi media gt Video alevt or at the command line with alevt The application saves all the pages of the selected station just activated with motv Browse pages by entering the desired page number or by clicking a page number Move forward or backward through the pages by clicking or lo cated in the lower window margin 16 3 Webcams and motv If your webcam is already supported by Linux access it with motv Find a sum mary of the supported USB devices at http www linux usb org lf you have already used motv to
130. annot access Linux file systems Help provides some instructions for the tool 2 2 Settings The GNOME desktop can be customized according to your preferences and needs Click the Start Here icon on the desktop If this icon is not visible start Nautilus by right clicking the desktop then selecting New Window Under Lo cation enter preferences Open the various configuration dialogs by double clicking the respective icons Note In the individual modules access specific help for the options with Help The system immediately adopts every change made in a config uration module Note cl 2 2 1 Keyboard In the Keyboard module determine settings such as the repeat rate and sound events associated with your keyboard The module consists of the Keyboard and Audio tabs Use the Audio tab to configure of an audio signal for your key board For audible notification when a wrong key is pressed activate the corre sponding radio button Exit the Keyboard module with Close or go the accessi 2 2 Settings bility module with Accessibility The functionality of this module is described in Accessibilityjon page 7 2 2 2 Mouse Configuration The mouse configuration consists of three tabs Buttons Cursor and Motion The configuration options of the Buttons tab refer to the Mouse Orientation Left handed users should activate Left handed mouse
131. assistant YaST has been expanded and simplified Get to know the graphical desktop environments KDE and GNOME and learn how to adapt them to your personal preferences The following sections intro duce some very useful and interesting programs from the large range of available applications in different categories including office programs such as OpenOf fice org web browsers programs to manage your schedule file managers scan ning tools and image editing programs Additionally find information about the SUSE help system and the available in formation sources containing further documentation Also included are a list of frequently asked questions about SUSE LINUX Changes in the User Guide The following is a list of the changes introduced in this guide as compared to the previous version SUSE LINUX 9 1 The instructions for the installation and configuration with YaST have been moved to the Administration Guide The following chapters have been revised gt The chapter about OpenOffice org now includes a section discussing the migration of MS Office documents to the OpenOffice org formats gt The chapter about GNOME has been updated to reflect the current version gt The chapters about the KDE desktop KOrganizer schedule manager KAddressbook contact organizer KMail and about synchronizing handhelds with KPilot have been updated to match the current version of KDE Typographical Conventions The follow
132. at has not yet been sent It is useful if working offline or if the outgoing mail server is temporarily unreach able Drafts is used for saving unfinished e mail messages The Trash folder is intended for temporary storage of deleted items The folder can be emptied au tomatically by activating the respective option under Tools gt Settings gt Mail Preferences 13 4 E Mail New folders can be created under Local Folders or as subfolders of existing folders Create as complex a folder hierarchy as desired To create a new folder while in the Inbox view select File gt Folder gt New Folder In the follow ing dialog enter a name for the new folder Leave the Folder Type as Mail for a new mail storage folder Use the mouse to determine the parent folder under which to place the new folder Exit the dialog with OK To move a message into a folder select the message to move Right click to open the context menu Select Move to Folder and in the dialog that opens the des tination folder Click OK to move the message The message header in the orig inal folder is shown with a line through it meaning it is marked for deletion in that folder The message is stored in the new folder Messages can be copied in a similar manner Manually moving a number of messages into different folders can be time consuming Filters can be used to automate this procedure
133. ata or audio tracks multisession CDs In the Name of Media tab specify a name description publisher and other details for the CD Under File system specify settings for the file system on the CD RockRidge Joliet UDF Also determine how symbolic links file permissions and blanks are treated In the Advanced tab experienced users can specify additional settings SUSE LINUX uooolddy Buung Gy eui ae 217 218 Data Project size 71 4 mB Writing Settings Volume Desc Filesystem Advanced 5 Speed Auto o m Device Writing Mode r Auto E Options E Simulate X On the fly X Burntree EJ Only create image E E Verify written data K3b Defaults User Defaults Save User Defaults Figure 17 2 Burning CDs with K3b 17 3 Creating an Audio CD Basically there are no significant differences between creating an audio CD and creating a data CD Select File gt New Audio Project Drag and drop the indi vidual audio tracks to the project folder The audio data must be in MP3 WAV or Ogg Vorbis format The sequence of the tracks can be determined by moving them up or down in the project folder The dialog for burning an audio CD is not very different from the dialog for burning a data CD However the option Disc at once and the Track at once mode bear greater importance The Track at once mode inserts an intermiss
134. ate typing The lift of key should be 2 4 mm and the working point should be distinctly felt Here 50 80 g is recommended as the force of the key depression stroke Those who type a lot should take regular breaks Learning the touch system helps because the workload is distributed across all fingers Split or individually separable keyboards are something to which you have to get accustomed but nevertheless are an alternative worth considering They have been constructed according to the latest ergonomic findings and are already recommended in some standards They prevent wrist strain to the side The keyboard of a notebook or laptop cannot correspond to the standards because of the crowded keys A notebook should therefore not be used as workstation equipment unless it is linked to an external keyboard and mouse 22 2 4 The Mouse Due to the advance of graphical user interfaces users are practically forced to use a mouse The intensive use of the mouse can cause not only fatigue but also dis orders in the hands arms and shoulders An example of this is RSI The danger increases when a bad mouse is used So far there are no commonly accepted standards for an ergonomic mouse Often a PC is sold with the standard mouse 22 2 Office Equipment This mouse should certainly be examined closely Is the mouse really suitable or should it be replaced by a better one Have the dealer unpack several mice for you to try The cable is prob
135. ated files and subdi rectories are assigned to the group to which the directory belongs Consider the following example directory drwxrwxr 2 root archive 48 Nov 19 17 12 backup Set the setuid bit with the command chmod g s test Subsequently the ac cess permissions appear as follows drwXrwXr 2 root archive 48 Nov 19 17 12 backup 21 2 5 The Sticky Bit There is also the sticky bit It makes a difference whether it belongs to an exe cutable program or a directory If it belongs to a program a file marked in this way will be loaded to the RAM to avoid needing to get it from the hard disk each time it is used This attribute is used rarely as modern hard disks are fast enough If this attribute is assigned to a directory it prevents users from deleting each other s files Typical examples include the tmp and var tmp directories drwxrwxrwt 2 root root 1160 2002 11 19 17 15 tmp 21 2 6 Access Control Lists The traditional permission concept for Linux file system objects such as files or directories can be expanded by means of ACLs access control lists They allow the assignment of permissions to individual users or groups other than the origi nal owner or owning group of a file system object Files or directories bearing extended access permissions can be detected with a simple 1s 1 command rw r r 1 tux project3 14197 Jun 21 15 03 Roadmap SUSE LINUX IOUS eut ULM BUMJOM 269 270 The output of 1
136. ature cor responding modules whose visualization can be opened by right clicking the module title Experiment a little for example and experience how the charac ter of the music changes when the quantization of the Quantizer module ID 7 15 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor File Synthesis Module View About LADSPA Saw VCO IDs xnur ui PUNOS Figure 15 14 The AlsaModularSynth Main Panel is changed from pentatonic to 1 6 full range scale Complete instruments can be found in the folder instruments The patches miniams ams as well as phaser instrument ams are actually quite versatile These patches are sup plied with a number of presets that can be called with MIDI program changes A few of the presets are defined with the Parameter View dialog available from View A systematic guide to the creation of custom patches is provided in the tutorial folder 15 11 2 AlsaModularSynth as an Effect Processor Especially in the JACK mode AlsaModularSynth can be used as a versatile ef fect processor One example for this is example capture ams lf you connect an external sound source to your sound card and use alsamixer to specify the correct settings for the capture the example will work even without JACK With the Ladspa Browser started with Module gt Show Ladspa Browser generate SUSE LINUX 201 202 Available Ladspa Plugins t bode shifter 1431 au i Bode frequ
137. ays to list the file Test file in the directory test by entering the relative path with 1s test or by specifying the absolute path with 1s test To list the contents of home directories of other users enter 1s username In the above mentioned directory tree one of the sample users is tux In this case ls tux would list the contents of the home directory of tux Refer to the current directory with a dot The next higher level in the tree is repre sented by two dots By entering 1s seethe contents of the parent directory of the current directory The command 1s shows the contents of the direc tory two levels higher in the hierarchy Second Example Working with Paths Here is another example to illustrate how to move around in the directories of your SUSE LINUX system 21 1 Introduction to Bash 1 Change into your home directory with the command cd Then create a di rectory in it with the name test2 by entering mkdir test2 2 Change into the new directory with cd test2 and create a subdirectory in it with the name subdirectory To change into it use the expansion function enter cd su then press Tab The shell will expand the rest of the directory name 3 Now try to move the previously created file Test backup into the current directory subdirectory without changing the direc tory again To achieve this specify the relative path to that file mv test Testbackup The dot at the end of this command
138. ble across different computing platforms In addition to the basic browser Mozilla includes a number of extra components such as a mail component and a web page design component This chapter focuses on the web browser compo nent 10 1 The Initial Browser Window 116 102 Working with Tabs oo 119 103 Preferences ee eee ee eee 120 JOSMOIG GSM OIIZO SUL 116 10 1 The Initial Browser Window In its default configuration the window presented by the browser includes these elements the actual document window occupying the majority of the window and used to display web pages the menu bar the navigation toolbar and the personal toolbar See Figure 10 1 There is also a combined status and compo nent bar at the bottom of the window Finally to the left of the document win dow Mozilla provides a sidebar that contains a number of different tabs each of them giving access to a particular task File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help 4 amp Home Bookmarks S The Mozilla Or S Latest Builds S Mozilla deutsch Sidebar Tabsw x Se Home User Contact Site Map Links Register Softwarg TEE Home overview EE Bookmarks Add Manage Search Home User gt Products gt SuSE Accessories gt Linux Penguins Name D Personal Toolbar Fol Linux Penguins Linux D E3Mozilla Projekt History Mozilla deutsch LJ E O4 E Done
139. both amounts together enter B3 B4 in cell B5 Now cell B5 should display the cor responding result If you have mistyped the numbers or estimated your phone bill inaccurately just reenter the amounts and Calc automatically updates the sum Calc offers many functions beyond the four fundamental arithmetic oper ations A comprehensive list arranged in categories is available under Insert gt Function Figure 3 8 A Spreadsheet Example for Calc Any spreadsheet can be easily extended For instance to insert another row be tween Fuel and Sun right click the 5 button to the left and select Insert Row from the context menu A new row is inserted below the current one and can im mediately be used for additional input Entering formulas in the above way is cumbersome when many cells are in volved For example if you have several items in your A column and want to add them try the SUM function In the field B6 enter the formula SUM B3 B5 An alternative possibility is to click the Sigma icon next to the input line and enter the range manually This formula adds all numbers from B3 to B5 You can also specify several ranges at once As shown in the above formula a range is defined by two cell addresses sep arated by a colon Separate ranges with semicolons Accordingly the for mula SUM B3 B5 D3 D5 adds everything from B3 to B5 and from D3 to D5 Basically the formula is a short form of a longer one which
140. bove K3b offers other functions such as the creation of DVD copies reading audio data in WAV format rewriting CDs or the integrated audio player A detailed description of all available pro gram features is available at http k3b sourceforge net 17 5 Writing ISO Images Digital Cameras and Linux gPhoto 2 0 is a command line program for communicating between the com puter and a digital camera It is compatible with several graphical interfaces front ends including gtKam Konqueror Kamera and GnoCam This chap ter covers the use of gtKam Konqueror and Digikam HUE RGA A PE A 222 182 Installating the Programs 222 A wd du ha d Bae ES 222 SMe oe kee A a 223 Be O edo Gia ee ota Ee ee 224 18 6 For More Information 225 xnur pub SOJOWUDY OLI6IG 222 A comprehensive list of supported cameras is available at http www gphoto org cameras html If gphoto2 is installed retrieve the list with the command gphoto2 list cameras gphoto2 help provides informa tion about the available commands in the command line interface 18 1 Connecting to the Camera The fastest and most convenient way to connect digital cameras to the computer is USB provided the kernel the camera and the computer support USB The standard SUSE kernel provides this support A suitable cable is also required Note Using the USB connection can quickly drain your camera s batteries Consider using a pow
141. can then be set with the sliders that appear after selecting Settings gt Slider This window also provides the sliders for bright ness contrast and color To use your sound card for audio playback check the mixer settings using gamix described in Mixers on page 176 For sound cards meeting the AC97 spec ifications set Input MUX to Line The volume can then be adjusted with the Master and Line sliders 16 1 3 Screen Proportions and Full Screen Mode Most television images have a height and width ratio of 4 3 These proportions can be set with Tools gt Screen Dimensions If 4 3 is selected here this is the default setting the screen dimensions are retained automatically even when the display size is changed With or Tools gt Fullscreen switch to full screen mode If the TV image in full screen mode is not scaled to the full monitor size some fine tuning is re quired Many graphics cards can scale the full screen mode television image to the full monitor size without changing the graphical mode If your card does not support this function the graphics mode must be switched to 640x480 for the full screen mode Create the related configuration in Settings gt Configuration After restarting rnotv the monitor mode is also changed if you have switched to full screen mode UJO2Qq9M PUD Opol O9plA AL Note The xawt v file is created automatically
142. cannot cause any serious damage if they are not activated by root The only virus scanners available in Linux search e mails for Windows viruses if Linux is used as a router or server Nevertheless you should back up important data and configurations Do I need to compile a kernel myself No this is usually unnecessary The kernel has become so large that there are about eight hundred options to consider during the configuration Be cause it is almost impossible to master all possible configurations and their effects it is strongly discouraged for inexperienced users to recompile the kernel Do so only at your own risk In cases of custom compiled kernels SUSE cannot provide any installation support Where can I see the system messages In a terminal window enter tail f var log messages as root Ad ditional interesting programs relating to this one are top procinfo and xosview Use the command less var log boot msg to view the boot messages I cannot log in to my computer with telnet I always get the answer Lo gin incorrect You are probably trying to log in as root For security reasons this is not possible via telnet by default With YaST set up a normal user account Log SUSE LINUX _______ 299 300 18 19 20 21 22 23 in with this user name Then change to the user root with su It is much better and safer however to use the program ssh instead of telnet The ssh program uses encrypted
143. cceleration select an application such as the OpenGL spectrum analyzer If the xmns plugins package is installed try the Infinity plug in To the left under the menu button there are five buttons with different letters on them These buttons allow quick access to additional menus dialog boxes and configurations The playlist can be opened with the PL button and the equalizer can be activated with the EQ button 15 3 3 kscd Audio CD Player kscd is an easy to use audio CD player It can be accessed from the SUSE menu under Multimedia gt CD gt KsCD To access the configuration menu click the tool icon kscd can be configured to search an online CDDB server for the name and track names of a CD 01 mixed by Paul Oakenfold 5 Y A Q Play Deep House Mix M Q Stop O Eject mem Previous Next Random Loop CDDB Extras v Figure 15 6 The kscd User Interface 15 3 4 The Audio CD Player WorkMan WorkMan offers a simple user interface with an abundance of functions It is ideal for those who prefer a CD player without the KDE look and feel 15 3 5 GNOME CD Player Applet This is a simple applet that can be added to a GNOME panel Add it by right clicking the panel and selecting Add to Panel Multimedia gt CD Player SUSE LINUX xnur ui PUNOS 185 15 4 Buffering and Latencies This section explains how uninterrupted audio playback can be ensured This probl
144. ce ee eee Ert E configuring an answering machine faxservices oooooccocoococcoccnncoo gt operating an answering machine SUSE LINUX 305 J Ja ases ts ae mb perd pedal on nce ant 110 JavaScript 2 0 06 ccc eee OR EREINEN VANESS 110 K A audio CDs configuring 6 6 cece eens 217 copying CDs cece sees 219 data CDS aia tra 216 KAddressBook 00 000e eee 19911103 creating address lists m searching for addresses 1103 A ttterzte ots 1102 remote resources 6 0 eee 102 Dc rrEER KDE xl ione bainan kore ESKE SiS clipboard esporas commands configuring ee eee accessibility background SCOlOIS P o saat Sie nies sede hp Keyboard eee give 118 mue M added ed eaaa deena tan A ation neta Rea Screensaver lorra iniri tritani aaa 116 o window decorations desktop 6 cece cece eee ees 161 desktop sharing 32 drives 22 lxevee re per eere i e mail applications 133 IONES ti e eines formatting floppy disks Klipper KMail Kopete main menu menus 6 pal aid shoved rindo ba PEO rr ci aes J el cana eo ida eta 12561 A O PC sutilities econo erre nesu 124 keyboard sbuying iaa 289 Index KGpg ses snenn bade empata eph her pe ed daa clipboard encryption drag and drop
145. cess the entire document or only a previously selected area A configuration dialog tells the module whether the original text is in printed type handwriting or standardized type Also set the language so the module can process the document correctly See Figure 19 5 OCR Image Spellchecking Starting Optical Character Recognition with GOCR GOCR is an Open Source project for optical character recognition The author of gocr is Joerg Schulenburg For more information about gocr see http jocr sourceforge net Using GOCR binary usr bin gocr e a ol o k at Dust size e les o o Space width Figure 19 5 OCR with Kooka Optical Character Recognition 19 6 Optical Character Recognition Switch to the OCR Result Text window and check the text which may need to be proofread To do this save the text with File Save OCR Result Text The text can then be processed with OpenOffice or KWrite uouooigddy Guiuuposg v O00 SUSE LINUX ______ 233 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP The GIMP The GNU Image Manipulation Program is a program for creating and editing pixel graphics In most aspects its features are comparable to those of Adobe Photoshop and other commercial programs Use it to resize and retouch photographs design graphics for web pages make covers for your custom CDs or almost any other graphics project It meets the needs of both amateurs and pro
146. cimal color code in Hex Triplet SUSE LINUX 245 cum os fo cvwm o E cow o CGH jo CE PO jo Hex Triplet 000000 Current ANNE gt Od ms 1001 amp JReset X Cancel P oK Figure 20 2 The Basic Color Selector Dialog The color selector defaults to selecting a color by hue which is usually easiest for a new user To select by saturation value red green or blue select the cor responding radio button to the right The sliders and number fields can also be used to modify the currently selected color Experiment a bit to find out what works best for you When the desired color is shown in Current click OK To restore the original values shown when the dialog was opened click Reset To abort changing the color click Cancel To select a color that already exists in your image use the color picker tool the icon for which resembles an eye dropper With the tool options set whether the foreground or background color should be selected Then click a point in the im age that shows the desired color When the color is right click Close to close the tool s dialog Painting and Erasing To paint and erase use the tools from the toolbox There are a number of options available to fine tune each tool Pressure sensitivity options apply only when a pressure sensitive graphics tablet is used 246 205 Editing Images Basic
147. close the window The Toolbox The main window of The GIMP shown in FigureD0 1 on the following page con tains the main controls of the application Closing it exits the application At the very top the menu bar offers access to file functions extensions and help Below that find icons for the various tools Hover the mouse over an icon to display in formation about it SUSE LINUX dINIS eu UM sordos Buyoindiuny 237 238 File Xtns Help amp dm DT Jads e Rect Select Options amp Mode Ek E FK Antialiasing Feather Edges Radius j 10 0 Auto Shrink Selection TT Sample Merged Free Select T Width 1 Height 1 px Figure 20 1 The Main Window The current foreground and background color are shown in two overlapping boxes The default colors are black for the foreground and white for the back ground Click the box to open a color selection dialog Swap the foreground and background color with the bent arrow symbol to the upper right of the boxes Use the black and white symbol to the lower left to reset the colors to the default To the right the current brush pattern and gradient are shown Click the dis played one to access the selection dialog The lower portion of the window con tains the Tool Options dialog It allows configuration of various options for the current tool 20 2 Starting The GIMP Layers Channels Paths Undo In the first section
148. ct information from your address book to another Evolution user right click the contact to share Select Forward Contact This sends the contact card as an attachment in an e mail Compose and send this message as usual To add a contact you have been sent go to the contact in the e mail message and click Save in addressbook to add the complete contact card to your address book 13 7 Public Address Books in Evolution By means of the LDAP protocol Evolution can access public address books such as those used by SUSE LINUX Openexchange Server or Microsoft Exchange Evo lution offers full access to these address books it can read them and add new entries If you use SUSE LINUX in a large network e g in your company do not hesitate to make use of this possibility Note Some specific information about your network is required for configur ing LDAP access Obtain this information from the responsible system administrator Note WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD pub ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 To configure access to an LDAP server from your workstation select Tools Settings gt Directory Servers All previously configured LDAP accesses are listed in the overview Click Add to add a new LDAP access A configuration assistant starts helping configure the LDAP access in a few steps Exit the wel come screen of the assistant with Next and specify the following settings in the dialogs Server Informat
149. cument itself select an image by clicking it When selected an image has little square handles on its edges Then select Graphics from the context menu to open a dialog in which to change various image settings such as the wrap type and border style To change the size of an image first click it to activate it Now click any of its handles keep the button pressed and drag the handle until the dashed frame reaches the desired size When you release the button the image is scaled accord ing to your changes To change the position of an image while leaving its size un changed click the image and keep the mouse button pressed Drag the image to the desired position 3 6 Spreadsheets with OpenOffice org Calc Calc is the spreadsheet module of OpenOffice org Use this application for example to handle your private or business accounting data If Writer is already running start Calc by selecting File gt New gt Spreadsheet After starting Calc presents an empty spreadsheet divided into rows and columns Rows are numbered from top to bottom and columns are lettered from left to right The intersection of a row and a column marks the location of a cell so each cell has a unique address coordinate For instance the address B3 refers to the cell located in the second column B and the third row This address is also shown at the top to the left of the entry field A cell may be active or inactive The currently
150. d from the toolbar The submenu Create From Selection allows sav ing an area of an image previously marked with the mouse Settings Settings adjusts of the look and feel of Kooka The toolbar and status bar can be switched on and off and keyboard shortcuts for menu entries can be defined Configure Toolbars provides a list of all the functions avail able to the toolbar Configure Kooka opens a configuration dialog in which to modify the look and feel of Kooka Normally however the defaults are sufficient In Tool Views enable and disable the thumbnail viewer the pre view the gallery the scanning parameters and the OCR result window Help The Help menu provides access to the online help manual for Kooka 19 4 The Menus Eile Image Settings Help 2636 AAA t Foam 56 Rx Image Name Size Eormat 4 e Viewer Y Scan Preview g 4 S 3 24Kooka Gallery 28 items n j B all jpg 1280x938 JPEG s Preview O x Scan Size 3 N Gallery Kooka Gallery QCUStOM a ES o c RX a Scanner Settings AGFA SNAPSCAN 1236U e r Autoselection gt Scan mode amp Color IC active on black WN r x scanner background O Halftone pattern DispersedDot8x8 Threshold Q a c8 _ vs Resolution 600 J r Selection 3 Threshold E E 8 qq A ls 2 2 width 72 mm Brightness S Q A
151. dad 56 RX r Image Name S ii Image Viewer 4 Scan Preview 4 Kooka Gallery E allljpg 12 i e andreas t ireasjpg E e eee ena RX Gallery Kooka Gallery xl Scanner Settings AGFA e SNAPSCAN 1236U zit Ig A r 1 Scan mode a Color ka B 7 MI ve o E Thumbnails 3 OCR Result Text Halftone pattern EX ait Resolution 300 m y 4 je Me 4 zi Final Scan JI Preview Scan J H iai e e K3 Loading file home tux kde share apps Scanimages all1 jpg 1280x938 pixel 32 bit Figure 19 1 The Kooka Main Window Click Scan Parameter again Choose between color and black and white scan ning and set the resolution with the slider See Figure 19 3 on pageD31 The higher the resolution the better the quality of the scanned image is However this also results in a correspondingly larger file and the scanning process can take a very long time at high resolutions Activate Use custom gamma table and click Edit to change the settings for brightness contrast and gamma Once all settings have been made click Final Scan to scan the image The scanned image is then displayed in the image viewer and as a thumbnail When prompted select the format in which to save the image To save all the future im ages in that same format check the corresponding box Confirm with OK 19 4 The Menus Some of the functions of the toolbar are also available in the File and Image
152. dard parameters specify the settings under File gt Preferences Audio I O and Quality are important for the recording Even if tracks already exist pressing the recording button creates new tracks Initially this may be confusing as these tracks cannot be seen in the standard size pro gram window To import audio files select Project gt Import Audio The program supports the WAV format as well as the compressed MP3 and Ogg Vorbis formats See Compressing Audio Datajon page for more information about these formats SUSE LINUX _______ 189 15 6 2 Editing Audio Files The AudioTrack menu can be opened to the left of each track and offers various views One of them is Waveform dB which is not suitable for checking the sig nal tuning as in this view the data is always adjusted to the maximum amplitude of the track Depending on the application various view formats for segment selections are offered under Set Selection Format With Set Snap To Mode the segment boundaries can automatically be adapted to the selected view format For ex ample if you select PAL frames as the view format and activate Snap To the segment boundaries will always be selected in multiples of frames The many editing tools are all equipped with tool tips and should therefore be quite easy to use The Undo History function which can be accessed with View gt History is a useful feat
153. ddr 128 0 To terminate timid ity enter killall timidity to kill all timidity processes 15 11 AlsaModularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor AlsaModularSynth from the package alsamodular is a digital replica of an analog modular synthesizer The program has a JACK interface and can load all kinds of LADSPA effect plug ins Thus it can also be used as a versatile effect pro cessor Enter ams to start AlsaModularSynth from the command line The parameter j activates the JACK mode provided the JACK engine jackd is running see The on page 187 The required port connections can be established with QJackConnect Individual ports are generated for each PCM module in the JACK mode AlsaModularSynth only appears in the list of QJack Connect if at least one PCM module exists The directory usr share doc packages alsamodular contains numerous example patches that demonstrate the various possibilities Detailed documenta tion is available in the subdirectory html 15 11 1 Synthesizer Patch Examples The application package for AlsaModularSynth provides a selection of patch examples to allow the user to start working with the application right away The folder demos is located in the directory usr share doc packages alsamodular A few autonomous patches are contained there that generate interesting random sound loops The files concerned begin with example ams demo Patches containing scope and spect rum in their name fe
154. different views From each of these views drag individual titles or entire directories and drop them into the playlist to include them in the list The following is a descrip tion of the function of each tab File Browser This is the top tab which opens a file browser This corresponds to the standard KDE file selector dialog with the usual controls to navigate the file system Enter a URL or directory directly into the text input field From the contents displayed drag elements to the playlist to include them in it Collection Use this view to manage and display your personal collection of ti tles The collection view may include files from different locations Selecting Actions gt Configure Folders opens a dialog with which to include all 15 3 Players your music folders in a list To scan all these directories select Actions Start Scan The result is displayed as a tree structure Using Primary and Secondary organize the two top branches of the tree according to the cri teria Album Artist Genre and Year Once the tree view is ready find titles simply by typing them into the input field The selection in the tree view jumps to the first matching entry automatically as you type Context With this tab view information about your collection and various data related to the current artist For example the view informs you about your favorite titles the newest titles added
155. directory rmdir option s directoryname Deletes the specified directory if it is already empty chown option s username group file s Transfers ownership of a file to the user with the specified user name R Changes files and directories in all subdirectories chgrp option s groupname file s Transfers the group ownership of a given file to the group with the spec ified group name The file owner can only change group ownership if a member of both the current and the new group chmod options mode file s Changes the access permissions The mode parameter has three parts group access and access type group accepts the following characters u user g group o others 21 3 Important Linux Commands For access grant access with and deny it with The access type is controlled by the following options r read w write x eXecute executing files or changing to the directory s Setuid bit the application or program is started as if it were started by the owner of the file As an alternative a numeric code can be used The four digits of this code are composed of the sum of the values 4 2 and 1 the decimal result of a binary mask The first digit sets the set user ID SUID 4 the set group ID 2 and the sticky 1 flags The second digit defines the permissions of the owner of the file The third digit defines the permissions of the group members and the last digit sets the permissions f
156. directory can be shown The write permission w means new files can be created The executable permission x means the user can change to this directory In the above example this 260 21 4 Users and Access Permissions means the user tux as well as the members of the group project3 can change to the ProjectData directory x view the contents r and add new files to it w The rest of the users on the other hand are given less ac cess They may enter the directory x and browse through it r but not insert any new files w 21 2 2 Modifying File Permissions Changing Access Permissions The access permissions of a file or directory can be changed by the owner and of course by root with the command chmod followed by the parameters changing the permissions and one or more file names The parameters form different categories 1 users concerned u user owner of the file g group group that owns the file o others additional users if no parameter is given the changes apply to all categories 2 a character for deletion amp 48211 setting or insertion 3 the abbreviations y read w write m x execute 4 file name or names separated by spaces If for example the user tux in Example on the facing page also wants to grant other users write w access to the directory ProjectData he can do this using the command chmod o w ProjectData If however he wants to deny all u
157. e name of the widget from Widget Color and click the color bar below to choose a suitable color in the color editor Finally adjust the contrast settings and save the modified scheme under a name of your choice To apply this scheme globally activate Apply colors to non KDE applications Window Decorations Select a decoration style for your application windows from the list under the General tab Click Apply to test the selected style To position or move individ ual elements of the title bar activate Use custom titlebar button positions and re arrange the elements under the Buttons tab If additional configuration options are available for the selected style access these under the Configure tab Background This module lets you set the properties of your desktop s background The selec tion made with Settings for Desktop decides to which desktops these settings should be applied You can get an impression of the effect of your settings from the preview to the right In the Wallpaper section decide whether to use No Wallpaper at all or a single Wallpaper The desktop background can also be taken over by a special slide show program The Options section lets you set various settings related to positions colors and shading Depending on the background settings made so far some items may not be active Advanced Options opens a dialog for a number of special settings
158. e are any luxury a footrest if your feet do not reach the floor 22 1 3 Good Lighting for Productive Work Generally speaking workplace lighting does not come close to the intensity of light outdoors This difference is unnoticed because the human faculty of percep tion is very flexible The influence of lighting conditions on our own efficiency is often underestimated If the light is too bright you cannot see what is on the screen If it is too dark sharpness of vision decreases The wrong lighting over strains the visual system and eventually causes symptoms of fatigue and stress Itis assumed that a combination of general lighting and individual workstation lighting is best For the workstation at home the combination of a high powered ceiling lamp 500 watts preferably with a dimmer and one or two workplace lamps is recommended The fluorescent lamps usually found in offices for gen eral lighting should be supplemented by individual workstation lamps The lighting should however not be too intense and be individually adjustable Stark contrasts should be avoided Be careful with strong desk lamps Good illumina tion is unfortunately very expensive and the minimum requirements of lighting can also be fulfilled with cheaper illumination layouts tis important that you are exposed to daylight A view outside is prefer able General lighting is considered pleasant if it is not below 250 lx usually 500 Ix is required
159. e contact list that can be used to store the desired contacts You can drag and drop contacts into the desired folder This al lows grouping contacts for a better overview File Edit Settings Help 3 O a ARB Contacts doptseq Jay eut T Figure 1 12 The Main Kopete Application Using Kopete It is necessary to establish a connection to the Internet to be able to chat with other participants When this is done clicking File gt Connection gt Connect All then establishes a connection between Kopete and the selected messaging service The main application windows features a list of contacts When you right click a contact marked as online a menu opens with various options Send that person a message or start a chatting session A chat allows invitation of other participants for real time discussion The connection to all other participants is closed when the creator of the chat session leaves the room Files can be transferred comfortably with an instant messenger by right clicking a user name Many options like Delete Contact 5how User Information Block User and Send File can be found here Clicking Send File opens a dialog for selecting the desired file Confirming with OK sends a dialog to the receiving user asking whether he wants to accept the file If he accepts the file transfer starts SUSE LINUX _______ 37 38 1 4 13 Font Administration with KFontinst By default SUSE LIN
160. e disk from the drive You can also select Eject which causes the medium to be unmounted and ejected Both methods only work if the CD or DVD is no longer accessed and any file manager window displaying the content of the CD or DVD has been closed 1 1 Desktop Components 1 1 4 The Printer Icon Right click the printer icon and choose Actions gt Print files The KPrinter di alog window starts This program enables you to adjust a number of settings and send print jobs directly The upper part of the main window like that in Fig ure 1 1 shows the selected printer To switch to another printer click the arrow next to the printer name and select the device to use from the list displayed r Printer Name JYJ X Properties State Idle accepting jobs Type prnigang Location 3 Etage Raum neben Teek che Comment HP Laserjet 4050 Series PS doptseq Jay eut E Files Copies Advanced Options Additional Tags Name Type Path em J README txt Plain Text home tux tmp en README txt LL uy e e Print system currently used l CUPS Common UNIX Print System j Connected to localhost 631 CJ Keep this dialog open after printing D Collapse System Options 2 Help 3 Cancel Figure 1 1 The Main Window of KPrinter To configure the selected printer click Properties A configuration dialog like that shown in Figure 1 2 on the following page opens enabl
161. e format used for GIMP patterns Saving an image in this format enables using the image as a fill pattern in GIMP JPG JPG or JPEG is a common format for photographs and web page graphics without transparency Its compression method enables reduction of file sizes but information is lost when compressing It may be a good idea to use the preview option when adjusting the compression level Levels of 85 percent to 75 percent often result in an acceptable image quality with rea sonable compression Saving a backup in a lossless format like XCF is also recommended If editing an image save only the finished image as JPG Re peatedly loading a JPG then saving can quickly result in poor image quality GIF Although very popular in the past for graphics with transparency GIF is less often used now because of license issues GIF is also used for ani mated images The format can only save indexed images See Image Modes on pageD49 for information about indexed images The file size can often be quite small if only a few colors are used PNG With its support for transparency lossless compression free availability and increasing browser support PNG is replacing GIF as the preferred format for web graphics with transparency An added advantage is that PNG offers partial transparency which is not offered by GIF This enables smoother transitions from colored areas to transparent areas antialiasing To save the image in the chosen format press
162. e four lines shown in Ex ample 5 3 are relevant All other lines can be deleted xnu ui PUNOS Example 15 3 timidity cfg of eawpats12_full rar source gravis cfg source gsdrums cfg source gssfx cfg source xgmap2 cfg Then the file permissions must be updated To do this enter the command chmod Ra r usr share timidity eawpats To use sound fonts instead of the Gravis instrument patches modify the file usr share timidity timidity cfg For example to use the Vintage Dreams sound font with timidity create a timidity cfg consisting of a single line soundfont usr share sounds sf2 Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2 More in formation about this subject is available in usr share doc packages timidity C README sf 15 10 3 Starting timidity with the Graphical Interface There are few programs that offer as many program interfaces as timidity For an overview enter man timidity The Athena Widget Interface is a mature inter face that is started with usr bin timidity iatv amp Note You should not be in the directory usr share timidity when you start timidity Note SUSE LINUX _______ 199 200 15 10 4 The ALSA Server Mode of timidity To start timidity in the ALSA server mode enter usr bin timidity iA B2 8 Os amp Amessage suchasOpening sequencer port 128 0 128 1 will be displayed showing the MIDI port by means of which the synthe sizer can be addressed e g with vkeybd a
163. e like Readme t xt simply enter less Readme txt to display the text in the console window Use to scroll down one page Use Page Up and Page Down to move forward or backward in the text To exit less press O Instead of less you can also use the older program more However it is less con venient because it does not allow you to scroll backwards The program less got its name from the the precept that less is more and can also be used to view the output of commands in a convenient way To see how this works read Pipes on the current page 21 1 7 Pipes Normally the standard output in the shell is your screen or the console window and the standard input is the keyboard To forward the output of a command to an application such as less use a pipeline To view the files in the test directory enter the command 1s test less The contents of the test directory will be displayed with less This only makes sense if the normal output with 1s would be too lengthy For instance if you view the contents of the dev directory with 1s dev you will only see a small portion in the window View the entire list with 1s dev less Itis also possible to save the output of commands to a file For example 1s test Content generates a new file called Content that contains a list of the files and directories in test View the file with less Content You can also use a file as the input for a command For example sort the text lines
164. e objects in one window and access the destination path for those files in the second window To move the files drag the files from one window to the other and drop them there Copying files is a little more complicated Right click the object to copy and select Duplicate Then move the copy to the new directory 2 3 File Management with Nautilus The context menu that appears when right clicking an object provides functions for renaming files and other tasks 2 3 3 Configuring Nautilus Nautilus retrieves its default font and other preferences from the desktop config uration To set Nautilus specific preferences select Edit gt Preferences in any Nautilus window The configuration dialog offers four tabs Views Behavior Icon Captions and Preview The Views dialog allows switching the Default View between Icon View and List View A sorting order can be set for any of these options The Behavior dialog allows choosing between single click and double click re sponse and also sets the handling of executable files These can either be started on activation or the content displayed The operating mode of the trash is also set here Activate a confimation dialog before deletion if desired Include a Delete command that bypasses trash can also be set The files are immediately deleted if this option is activated The Icon Captions dialog features three options for determining what in
165. e pro gram handles all file types supported by the sound server acting as a back end currently aRts or GStreamer amaroK enables you to put together playlists very easily Compile playlists with a few drag and drop actions Playlists can be created using a number of differ ent views simplifying management of music titles You can also drag and drop files from Konqueror Save playlists in m3u or pls format so you can share them with any other players using these formats After starting amaroK for the first time the program displays two windows The smaller window contains the usual controls of a media player and the other shows the playlist See Figure 15 4 on the next page Both windows can be hid den as needed To display or hide the playlist click PL in the player window To hide the player window itself set the program s preferences accordingly When the player window is hidden the control elements are displayed at the bottom of the playlist window To open the amaroK application menu right click any where in the player window or select the menu button in the bottom right of the playlist window The menu includes a help entry which describes the program s numerous features SUSE LINUX xnur ui PUNOS 181 182 L E a 3 f 3 11 Alphaville 11 B B King fl Bad Religion Beastie Boys Big Joe Truner Troyce Key Annie Maybie The Paul deLay Band Mine All M The Paul deLAY B
166. e set under Staff Staff Properties Notes can easily be entered with the help of the mouse First choose the length of the note and any required accidental in the toolbar Click to insert a note or right click to insert a rest The Insert menu provides objects like clef meter and key More information about NoteEdit is available in the directory usr share doc packages noteedit In Linux there are several MIDI sequencers some of which are very mature For example Jazz is a proven stable program The development of Rosegarden the classic among sequencer programs and notation editors for Linux has been resumed Therefore this program may also be of interest to you MusE is also a very active project Meanwhile the program can be used as a sequencer 15 12 NoteEdit and MIDI Sequencers TV Video Radio and Webcam The configuration of TV cards is integrated in the configuration tool YaST If your card has been correctly identified it can be automatically configured Otherwise enter the card settings manually The following sections focus on the motv application created by the author of the BTTV driver Another TV application is KWinTV If you prefer KWinTV it should be easy to use after reading this chapter 16 31 Watching TV with motv 208 16 2 Video Text with alevt 210 16 3 Webcams and motv 210 16 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your
167. eated Expiration OS Ahatea gS alo T e P 13 05 2003 11 03 18 13 05 2003 PER 13 05 2003 11 03 38 13 05 2003 Io E 13 05 2003 11 05 39 13 05 2003 CC 13 05 2003 11 05 47 13 05 2003 F Subject Desktop Sharing VNC invitation DE Manage Invitations De cf You have been invited to a VNC session If you have the KDE Rel Connection installed just click on the link below Dl vnc invitationtUe eQO 10 10 100 189 0 Otherwise you can use any VNC client with the following paramete Y an Column 1 Line 1 gt Defaults a Figure 1 8 Desktop Sharing with Invitation by E Mail 1 4 10 Screenshots with KSnapshot With KSnapshot create snapshots of your screen or individual application win dows Start the program from the main menu or from the command line with the command ksnapshot The dialog window of KSnapshot consists of two parts SUSE LINUX 33 34 See Figure 1 9 The upper area contains a preview of the current screen and three buttons for creating and saving the screenshots In the lower part of the window you can set some options to decide how the screenshot should be created r Current Snapshot 28 New Snapshot Print Snapshot Options Snapshot delay No delay j Only grab the window containing the pointer 9 Help y Quit Figu
168. ece eee eens calendar 06 cece cece een LE E EA CALC POTICS Rais aie Sea ipae dee ua dag a configuring cece eee eee 192 SOVOTES cueste A eet eade rl E PEINE ignes cbdueia tas 96 Starline sete ETNEA E mee MOON PE 195 KPilot a dev pilob ataca ASIS sese eer iia KDE Addressbook conduit KOrganizer iis ccce eret working with ooocoooccccoooo A E E EEEO EEEE 185 KSnapshot ooccoccccccocccccccccccoconcnnoo KIWI iecit sexe rather a L 1855s E O 262 1274 Linux removing s reres kiah heien eee 298 aep P 1272 lu I 274 IS UR 271 M MAN Pages c deem te herede res MIES tonal A tbe era eie eet mOnitOfS ica aaa exte eer rire Rein MOTE 5 deals MIO lusus ade a a O dee enn Bra launchers proportions cece eee 209 seeking channels 208 video source 2 08 MOUNE Liezen go deni de ons NT MR dx CE a 275 mouse SDUYING pas 290 Mozilla tenter eret ree ey dose ne 115 configuring eeose etsera irr raki nuii 120 A vine anus Sader dh gana Eaa 121 MS DOS commands e cece eee e ee 264 file systems o ipie anki yei 264 intoolS eiii hidini EE RR hen 264 ini RM CHE DR 271 N Nautilus astenia is Seb etes configuring n s uiaiia navigating csse 49 NoteEdit ooococooccccocococonocncornnnos 205 nslookup AE E E E E 277 nXlVeDg cenwereser ve ii 211 A eda gaua eirin ce 211 impor
169. ecified user By cross checking and signing these keys you contribute to the estab lishment of a web of trust Note l 11 1 Key Management Select the key to sign in the key list Select Keys gt Sign Key s In the follow ing dialog designate the private key to use for the signature An alert reminds you to check the authenticity of this key before you sign it If you have performed this check click Continue and enter the password for the selected private key in the next step Other users can now check the signature by means of your public key Trusting Keys Normally you are asked by the corresponding program whether you trust the key whether you assume it is really used by its authorized owner This happens each time a message needs to be decrypted or a signature must be checked To avoid this edit the trust level of the newly imported key By default a newly im ported key is listed with a meaning that no concrete value has been assigned for the trust level Right click the newly imported key to access a small context menu for key man agement Select Edit Key in Terminal from it KGpg opens a text console in which to set the trust level with a few commands At the prompt of the text console Command enter t rust Now on a scale between 1 and 5 make an estimate of how much you trust the signers of the im ported key to have checked the true identity of the key owner Enter the select
170. ed value at the prompt Your decision If you are really sure about the signers trustworthiness enter 5 Answer the following question by entering y Finally enter quit to exit the console and return to the list of keys The key now has the trust level U1t imate 11 2 The Key Server Dialog Several Internet based key servers offer the public keys of many users To engage in encrypted communication with a large number of users use these servers to distribute your public key For this purpose export your public key to one of these server Similarly KGpg enables you to search one of these servers for the keys of certain people and import their public keys from the server 11 2 1 Importing a Key from a Key Server By means of the Import tab in the key server dialog import public keys from one of the Internet based key servers Use the drop down menu to select one of SUSE LINUX 6d2 uii uoudAIou3 127 128 the preconfigured key servers and enter a search string e mail address of the communication partner or the ID of the key to find When you click Search your system connects to the Internet and searches the specified key server for a key that matches your specifications Refer to Figure 11 3 Import Export Key Servers Key server hkp pgp mit edu gt Text to search or ID of the key to import Close Figure 11 3 Search Screen for Importing a Key If your search on the key server
171. ed here Find further background information about ACLs in the Administration Guide 21 3 Important Linux Commands This section gives insight into the most important commands of your SUSE LINUX system Along with the individual commands parameters are listed and where appropriate a typical sample application is introduced To learn more about the various commands use the manual pages accessed with man followed by the name of the command for example man 1s 21 3 Important Linux Commands In the man pages move up and down with and PgDn Move between the beginning and the end of a document with and End End this viewing mode by pressing Learn more about the man command itself with man man There are many more commands than listed in this chapter For information about other commands or more detailed information the O Reilly publication Linux in a Nutshell is recommended In the following overview the individual command elements are written in different typefaces The actual command and its mandatory options are always printed as command option Specifications or parameters that are not required are placed in square brackets Adjust the settings to your needs It makes no sense to write 1s file s ifno file named file s actually exists You can usually combine several parameters for example by writing 1s 1ainsteadof1s 1 a 21 3 1 File Commands File Administration ls option s file s If you run 1s wi
172. elect Bookmarks Smart Bookmarks Toolbar gt Folder actions gt Edit A window opens in which to edit the bookmarks To create a new bookmark mark Smart Bookmarks Tool bar and select File New item Enter a name in Name and the web ad dress in URL The Smart URL field is a URL that additionally contains a wild card for the entered string For example the smart URL for Google is http www google com search q s s is the wild card Save your bookmark settings with File gt Save 9 4 Settings and Controls Modify the configuration of the browser with Settings Preferences This dia log provides access to settings controlling both appearance and functionality Galeon features built in password management and cookie controls It also has options that specify the web sites from which images may be downloaded All these options can be accessed through a single dialog via Tools gt Cookies View Cookies SUSE LINUX UO9J D2 JSSMOJ JSM SUL 113 9 5 For More Information For more information about Galeon see http galeon sourceforge net The GNOME home page http www gnome org can also be helpful 114 95 For More Information The Mozilla Web Browser Mozilla is a web browser developed as an Open Source program with the aim of providing an Internet application that is fast compliant with standards and porta
173. ely the workstation should be individually adapted to the person and the working task Flexibility is the key Easily movable rotatable and ideally screens that retract into the table are encouraged Some people need considerably more It is a good idea for users to look away from the screen from time to time In this way their eyes can adapt to a different distance If a document is being copied it should be at the same distance as the screen to avoid frequent changes of focus The difference in luminance between the direct working area the screen and the immediately surrounding areas such as the screen case should not be more than three to one For this reason computer cases in offices are not black The difference between the working area and the surroundings should not be more than ten to one Shiny areas create large differences of luminance This is why office furni ture is not available in bright colors and has a matt surface To minimize the reflex glare on the screen the screen and the keyboard should be arranged so the line of vision is parallel to window panes The further the screen is away from the window the better The screen should not be directly under a lighting strip but to the side of it The line of vision should be parallel to the lighting strip 22 2 3 The Keyboard and the Wrists It is well known that the keyboard arrangement derived from the typewriter is not necessarily ergonomic During typing
174. em is by no means limited to Linux but is inherent in all multitasking op erating systems In a multitasking operating system several processes usually run concurrently As the processor can only handle one process at a time each process is assigned a certain amount of time by the operating system s scheduler The switching action between processes normally happens so quickly that the user does not notice it However during audio playback even brief interruptions are noticeable in the form of clicks Therefore audio programs use a buffer for the playback enabling the audio data in the buffer to be emitted continuously by the sound card even when the audio program is interrupted by the scheduler Accordingly the play back is click free if the buffer is large enough to bridge the longest possible inter ruption However the buffer size also determines the reaction time latency of the pro gram Therefore the buffer size is kept as small as possible especially for interac tive applications such as real time synthesizers and DJ mixer consoles Basically the length of the interruptions depends on the system load and the priority of the process Consequently the size of the buffer required for click free playback can be reduced by increasing the priority of the audio program or by switching to a real time scheduler For this reason many audio programs attempt to switch their processes to a real time scheduler but switching a process to ano
175. en resolution The options are Wallpaper Centered Scaled and Stretched 2 2 7 Font doptsed JWONSD SUL This module determines the font to use for the desktop In a second step enable optional effects for the improvement of the font quality The upper part of the di alog window shows the fonts selected for Application font Desktop font Win dow title font and Terminal font Click one of the buttons to open a selection dialog in which to set the font family style and size The options for Font Ren dering and the additional configuration options accessible through Details are set to optimal values by default 2 2 8 Theme The style for all control elements on the desktop and of GNOME applications is set here Choose from various preinstalled themes Selecting a style in the list overview applies it automatically Details opens another dialog in which to cus tomize the style of single desktop elements like window content window bor ders and icons Making changes and leaving the dialog with Close switches the theme to Custom theme Click Save theme to save your modified theme under a custom name The Internet and other sources provide many additional themes for GNOME as tar gz files Install these with Install theme 2 2 9 Accessibility The settings of this module facilitate the use of the keyboard for users with mo tion impairments The modu
176. ency shifter bode shifter cv 1432 z chebstortion 1430 i t Chebyshev distortion cmt comb 1190 y lil gt Bode Search Label bodeShi erCY Author Steve Harris lt steve plugin org uk gt Copyright GPL Create Plugin Create Poly Plugin Figure 15 15 The Ladspa Browser modules for LADSPA effects Plug ins should always be created with Create Plu gin unless you use AlsaModularSynth as a polyphonic synthesizer Create Poly Plugin generates a separate plug in instance for each part 15 11 3 AlsaModularSynth as a Synthesizer After having used the MIDI patchbay kaconnect to connect AlsaModularSynth with a master keyboard Vkeybd or an external keyboard you can use the pro gram as a synthesizer If polyphony is not explicitly activated with the parameter poly AlsaModularSynth will be monophonic just like its classical model The envelope modules are single triggered as is often the case with analog syn thesizers This means that they are not restarted during legato play This allows interesting phrasing Multitriggering is activated by connecting the trigger output signal of the MCV module to the retrigger input port of the envelope module A few LADSPA plug ins greatly enhance the virtual analog sound of AlsaMod ularSynth The plug ins Saw VCO Mvclpf 3 Mvclpf 4 and Phaser1 by Fons Andersen deserve special attention Saw VCO is designed to resemble an 15 11 AlsaMod
177. ently by the lenses For red colors people are farsighted but for blue colors people are nearsighted Older screens often have con vergence errors the three beams of the screen tube are no longer aligned precisely so colored borders appear around letters for example Electromagnetic radiation emitting from the screen should be kept to a min imum 22 2 2 Screen Location A screen put in the wrong place leads to a cramped posture at work which can cause illnesses A work table that has insufficient depth often prevents the screen from being placed reasonably The natural position of the head and arms is de signed for work that lies in front of the body Ergonomics specialists have developed their own guidelines for the vision and gripping area These reject placing the screen to the side An exception is only when the screen is rarely used A reason for this placement is the fact that even the required minimum 80 cm worktable depth is insufficient with a large screen and the use of working documents Often the screen is placed as shown in many PC manual pictures on top of the computer case This also leads to an unnatural posture Observe yourself while you are reading Are you looking straight ahead or slightly down Shoulder keyboard and screen should be in one line so you always look directly at the screen This rule does not necessarily need to be observed all the time 288 222 Office Equipment Ultimat
178. ents for encryption in an external editor then encrypting the respective file with one of the methods described above you can use the inte grated editor of KGpg to create the file Open the editor Open Editor from the context menu enter the desired text and click Encrypt Then select the key to use and complete the encryption procedure To decrypt files use Decrypt and enter the password associated with the key Generating and checking signatures is just as easy as encrypting directly from the editor Go to Signature Generate Signature and select the file to sign from the file dialog Then designate the private key to use and enter the associ ated password KGpg informs you about the successful generation of the signa ture Files can also be signed from the editor by simply clicking Sign Verify To 11 3 Text and File Encryption check a signed file go to Signature Verify Signature and select the file to check in the following dialog As soon as you confirm the selection KGpg checks the signature and reports the result of the operation Another possibility is to load the signed file into the editor and click Sign verify 11 4 For More Information For theoretical background information about the encryption method refer to the brief and clear introduction on the GnuPG project pages at http www gnupg org documentation howtos html en This document also provides a list of further info
179. er unit GIMP defaults use inches as the other unit Click the unit to select another unit from the list of available units Changing the pixel size modifies the other unit size and vice versa The ratio between pixels and a unit is set in Resolution A resolution of 72 pixels per inch corresponds to screen display It is sufficient for web page graphics A higher resolution should be used for images to print For most printers a resolution of 300 pixels per inch results in an acceptable quality In Image Type select whether the image should be in color RGB or grayscale For detailed information about image types see Image Modes on page 249 Select the Fill Type for the new image Foreground and Background use the colors selected in the toolbox White uses a white background in the im age Transparent creates a clear image Transparency is represented by a gray checkerboard pattern Enter a comment for the new image in Image Comment SUSE LINUX dINIS eu UM sordos Buyoindiuny 239 240 When the settings meet your needs press OK To restore the default settings press Reset Pressing Cancel aborts creation of a new image 20 3 2 Opening an Existing Image To open an existing image select File Open or press CiM HO In the dialog that opens the current directory is listed above the center column Available di rectories are listed in the left
180. er adapter Note e Simply connect the camera to the USB port and turn on the camera You may need to switch your camera to a special data transfer mode For this procedure consult the manual of your digital camera 18 2 Installating the Programs Use YaST to install the gtkam package The other required packages are selected automatically Digikarn is included in the default installation If it is not installed use YaST to install it if desired 18 3 Using Konqueror KDE users can easily access digital cameras by means of the familiar Konqueror interface Connect your camera to the USB port A camera icon should appear on the desktop Click this icon to open the camera in Konqueror The camera can also be accessed by entering the URL camera in Konqueror Navigate through the camera s directory structure until the files are shown Use the usual Konqueror file management features to copy the files as desired More infor mation about using Konqueror is available in The Web Browser Konqueror on page 18 1 Connecting to the Camera 18 4 Using gtKam gtKam is a graphical interface for downloading and deleting pictures from the digital camera To adjust or edit your pictures use The GIMP as described in Chapter Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP on page File Folder Select Camera Help os ej al Index Settings F View Thumbnails E ZU E ES Olympus C 2100UZ 0 J E e Ey cay DCIM 0 P8280002 P8280003 P8280004 E 100
181. ere are changes that have not yet been saved a dialog opens to ask whether to do so Quit Ctr Q This exits the editor If there are unsaved changes to a loaded document KWrite shows a dialog asking whether to save before exiting SUSE LINUX JOPPA 4X91 eiuw eut 79 80 4 3 The Edit Menu This menu provides all the program s editing functions such as selecting and searching or replacing text according to certain patterns Undo Redo Use this to undo any unwanted changes and to restore the origi nal text after an undo step These functions are also available using the key board shortcuts CD D and Ctt Shiff 42 Cut CMX This cuts the currently selected text region Copy CMO This copies the selected text region to the clipboard Paste Ct V Use this to insert text from the clipboard You can also paste text by middle clicking Select All CD A This selects all the text in a document for example to copy and paste it into another document Deselect Ctrl Shiff A This menu item deselects a previously selected text area You can do the same by left clicking in the document window Block Selection Mode Cti Shift B KWrite not only supports marking and removing horizontal selections lines or paragraphs but also vertical selections any desired text block This item toggles the block selection mode Text marked in this way can be moved to the clipboard using
182. es A group in this case can be defined as a set of connected users with certain col lective rights For example call a group working on a certain project project 3 Every user in a Linux system is a member of at least one proprietary group nor mally users There can be as many groups in a system as needed but only root is able to add groups Every user can find out with the command groups of which groups he is a member File Access The organization of permissions in the file system differs for files and directories File permission information can be displayed with the com mand 1s 1 The output could appear as in Output Example 21 1 Sample Output Showing File Permissions rw r 1 tux project3 14197 Jun 21 15 03 Roadmap As shown in the third column this file belongs to user tux It is assigned to the group pro ject3 To discover the user permissions of the Roadmap file the first column must be examined more closely SUSE LINUX IOUS eut ut BUMLOM 265 rw r Type Users Permissions Group Permissions Permissions for Other Users This column is comprised of one leading character followed by nine char acters grouped in threes The first of the ten letters stands for the type of file system component The dash amp 8211 shows that this is a file A di rectory d a link 1 a block device b or a character device could also be indicated The next three blocks follow a standard pattern The
183. es can eaves drop Particularly on the Internet use encrypted transfer methods such as ssh to avoid the risk of malicious misuse of a password see the man page for ssh Caution il Miscellaneous passwd option s username Users may change their own passwords at any time using this command The administrator root can use the com mand to change the password of any user on the system su option s username The su command makes it possible to log in under a different user name from a running session When using the com mand without specifying a user name you will be prompted for the root password Specify a user name and the corresponding password to use the environment of the respective user The password is not required from root as root is authorized to assume the identity of any user halt option s To avoid loss of data you should always use this program to shut down your system reboot option s Does the same as halt except the system performs an immediate reboot clear This command cleans up the visible area of the console It has no options 21 4 The vi Editor Operating the vi editor takes some practice For many it is the preferred editor partly because it is available on any UNIX like operating system and is included in default Linux installations Also if nothing else works vi will The short in structions that follow should enable you to edit various configuration files and other types of files wit
184. es capisuite manual index html and on the project page http www capisuite de 14 1 Configuration Capisuite makes use of the CAPI programming interface for ISDN hardware Because this interface has only been available for Linux for a short time suitable drivers are not yet available for all ISDN adapters However drivers are already available for ISDN adapters from AVM and can easily be installed and configured with YaST Test the functionality of the CAPI driver by executing the command capiinfo as root If detailed information about the capabilities of the ISDN adapter is re turned the driver is installed correctly and CapiSuite can be installed with YaST and used 14 1 Configuration Note If needed installation instructions are published on the web site of the CAPlSuite project at http www capisuite de Note Following the installation YaST contains two modules for configuring the fax and answering machine functionality These modules are described below 14 1 1 Configuring Fax Services The YaST module Fax from the Network Devices group contains a form with a user list and buttons for the processing of list entries The list contains all the users already configured for the fax system The Capisuite scripts used here are multiuser and allow each user to send and receive faxes individually The target number of an incoming call determines which user receives the fax The list of this module is e
185. es of users dev device files that represent hardware components etc important files for system configuration etc init d boot scripts SUSE LINUX IOUS eut ut BUMOM 257 usr bin generally accessible programs bin programs needed early in the boot process usr sbin programs reserved for the system administrator sbin programs reserved for the system administrator and needed for booting usr include header files for the C compiler usr include g header files for the C compiler usr share doc various documentation files usr share man system manual pages man pages usr src source code of system software usr src linux kernel source code tmp var tmp temporary files usr all application programs var configuration files e g those linked from usr var log system log files var adm system administration data lib shared libraries for dynamically linked programs proc process file system usr local local distribution independent extensions opt optional software larger add on program packages such as KDE GNOME Netscape 258 21 1 Introduction to Bash 21 1 3 Bash Functions There are two important functions of the shell that can make your work a lot eas ler The history function To repeat a command that has been entered before press T until the previous command appears at the prompt Move forward through the list of previously entered commands by pressing To edit the command line
186. f the new archive in the input field below without the file extension Then 2 4 Important Utilities determine the archive type with the drop down menu above the name field Exit the dialog with OK and return to the main view of File Roller Now add files to the archive by inserting files from the desktop or the file manager with drag and drop or by selecting Edit Add Files In the following dialog select one or several files keep pressed to select multiple files or directories If necessary determine the following advanced options for the archive Add only if newer If the archive already contains a file with the same name the file is only added if it is newer than the one existing in the archive Include subfolders To compress an entire directory activate this option to in clude all subdirectories Exclude backup files Avoid unnecessary data trash by disabling the inclu sion of backup copies when creating an archive Exclude hidden files Usually hidden files do not contain any data that are relevant for the user By default they are not included in the archive to re duce the amount of data Exclude files This explicitly excludes certain files from the archive This option is useful if you want to compress entire directories but exclude certain files from the archive Instead of file names you can also specify search patterns Ignorecase File Roller ignores different spellings of file names and extensions
187. fessionals 201 Graphics Formats ooo o 236 20 2 Starting The GIMP o ooo oo 236 203 Getting Started in GIMP 239 204 Savinglmages o 240 20 5 Editing Images Basics o o 242 20 6 Editing Images Advanced Features 248 20 7 Printinglmages s lt ios sasa corenta titers 249 208 Configuring GIMP oaaao 251 20 9 For More Information 251 dINID SUL ULM sojydog OGuuoidiuplA 236 Like many other Linux programs The GIMP is developed as a cooperative effort of developers worldwide who volunteer their time and code to the project The program is under constant development so the version included in your SUSE LINUX may vary slightly from the version discussed here The layout of the indi vidual windows and window sections is especially likely to vary The GIMP is an extremely complex program Only a small range of features tools and menu items are discussed in this chapter See For More Information on page for ideas of where to find more information about the program 20 1 Graphics Formats There are two main formats for graphics pixel and vector The GIMP works only with pixel graphics which is the normal format for photographs and scanned images Pixel graphics consist of small blocks of color that together cre ate the entire image The files can easily become quite large because of this It i
188. ffice org Writer O Fahd T E g Mi m Unt edl active Figure 3 4 The Navigator in Writer 3 5 4 Working with the Stylist The Stylist can help you format text in a number of ways It can be opened or closed at any time by toggling Format Stylist or by pressing FTT The dia log window of the Stylist is shown in FigureD 5 on the following page If you set the drop down list at the lower edge of the Stylist to Automatic OpenOffice org tries to offer a selection of styles adapted to the task at hand On the other hand if you select All the Stylist offers all styles from the currently active group Select groups with the buttons at the top Text can be hard formatted or soft formatted Hard Formatting Formatting properties are directly assigned to a text range and each property must be applied to each range by hand The assignment is static and can only be changed manually This is only recommended for short documents Soft Formatting With this method text is not formatted directly It has a style applied to it The style itself can be modified quite easily Modifying a style automatically results in a formatting change of all the text to which it is as signed This approach has many advantages when creating larger documents the ses books and the like Although not as intuitive it is very efficient and SUSE LINUX SLINS eoyo 610 eoyjouedo SU 65 66 graph Styles magnon PHB Co
189. first enable the icon border View Show Icon Border Add a bookmark by clicking the icon border at the desired line A paper clip should appear after this to indicate that the bookmark has been set Remove a bookmark by clicking the corresponding clip To navigate between bookmarks press next bookmark and Page up previous bookmark Remove all bookmarks in one step by selecting Clear Bookmarks 4 6 The Tools Menu This menu provides a number of actions that can be used to format the current document in a basic way Highlight Mode This is set to Normal by default but you can choose from numerous highlight modes for different document formats such as HTML and programming languages End of Line The end of line characters as stored by KWrite should always be set according to the operating environment in which the documents are used and distributed Use this menu to choose UNIX Windows DOS or Macintosh Indent Text blocks can be indented by a certain amount as defined under Set tings gt Configure Editor Editing To indent the current text select Indent or press Ctrl To undo one level of indentation select Unindent or press Shift T SUSE LINUX JOPPA 4X91 eiuw eut 81 82 4 7 The Settings Menu Show Toolbar Enable this to display a toolbar of the main editing functions Show Statusbar Enable this for KWrite to inc
190. forma tion should be displayed for icons and how it should be displayed In the Pre view dialog select whether to activate preview thumbnails for certain file types 2 4 Important Utilities GNOME features a wealth of applets and applications This section provides an introduction to some of the most useful and interesting all of which are compati ble with the GNOME configuration scheme 2 4 1 Dictionary Dictionary is a useful applet for checking the spelling and the meaning of words An Internet connection is required as this applet accesses an online dictionary Enter the term to look up in Word The menu under Dictionary gives a choice between Look Up Word and Check Spelling By default the query is sent to the dict org server To use a different server select Edit Preferences Refer to Figure 2 2Jon the following page dict org allows you to choose between various SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 51 52 Dictionary Edit Help Word linux v E Look Up Word Jargon File 4 3 0 30 APR 2001 Linux lee nuhks or li nuks not li nuhks n The free Unix workalike created by Linus Torvalds and friends starting about pronunciation li nuhks is preferred because the name Linus F ee sound in Swedish Linus s family is part of Finland s 6 ethnic Swedish minority and Linus considers English short i tc closer to ee than English long i This may be the most
191. from overstraining the spine and the ver tebrate disks In extreme cases years of sitting in the wrong position can lead to muscular and skeletal illnesses Correct sitting means a frequent change of posture Different parts of the body are then constantly being used Basically it is a question of the correct adjust ment The height of your working chair is best when your forearms lying on the table are at right angles to your upper arms You should be able to place your feet completely on the floor and your thighs and lower legs should also be at right angles Gymnastic balls and balancing chairs offer an alternative to conventional seating arrangements Unfortunately a good chair constructed according to ergonomic criteria is rela tively expensive but the investment in your health is worth it Important features of a good chair include a backrest reaching to the shoulder blades and with an adjustable kinetic resistance support for the lumbar spinal column a seat that is also adjustable and can be tilted forwards or backwards automatic regulation of backrest and seat to retain an ideal angle springs that softly cushion the weight when sitting down stability through at least five legs and wheels that offer more resistance when you stand SUSE LINUX 92DJ O 10M SUI ui SOILIOUOBIJ 283 adjustable height of the seat according to standards 42 to 53 cm and back rest individual adjustment of arm rests if ther
192. from the file manager into this window SUSE LINUX 31 32 File Edit Action Settings Help ABD EARE Filename Size Method Size Now Ratio Timestamp CRC FA 67 306 Defl N 24 890 63 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm 35c0301b 4 087 Defl N 67 352 74 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm 6efaaffc bashref html 669 157 Defl N 115 423 83 0 9603 27 03 06 50 pm 11cbad55 0 files selected 3files 967 3 KB Figure 1 7 Ark File Archive Preview As the final step Ark compresses everything into the previously selected archive format For more information about Ark select Help gt Ark Handbook 1 4 9 Desktop Sharing You can share your desktop with other users working on other hosts Desktop sharing makes use of the RFB protocol more commonly referred to as VNC This feature makes a Linux desktop available to clients using other operating systems that support VNC To grant trustworthy users access to your desktop send them a password This can be done by means of an invitation Start the Control Center from the main menu and select Desktop Sharing in the Internet amp Network module E Caution Desktop Sharing and Security Make sure you send invitations only to people you consider absolutely trustworthy The recipient of an invitation has unrestricted access to all your personal data Because of this security concern a VNC connection is not kept alive for more than one hour Caution Select
193. g module such as the drawing scale grid properties and some print options Formula This entry provides a single dialog for setting some special print op tions for formulas Chart This defines the default colors used for newly created charts Data Sources Use this to define how external data sources should be accessed Note All settings as listed above are applied globally they are used as defaults for every new document you create Note 3 5 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer 3 5 Creating Texts with the AutoPilot To use a standard format and predefined elements for your own documents try the AutoPilot This is a small utility that lets you make some basic decisions then produces a ready made document from a template For example to create a busi ness letter select File gt AutoPilot then select Letter This opens the dialog shown in FigureB 3 on the next page Click Next in each page to proceed to the next one To modify any previous entries use Back Exit the dialog with Cancel Access a help document with Help When finished click Create OpenOffice org produces a letter according your specifications Now compose the text body of the letter itself AutoPilot is not limited to letters but can also assist in the creation of faxes agendas memos and presentations SUSE LINUX SLINS eoyjo 810 eoyouedo eu 63 64
194. ge of fdisk with man fdisk d Format the partition with mke2fs dev hdbl e Enter the following commands cd opt mkdir opt2 mount dev hdb1 opt2 cp axv opt2 Check thoroughly to see whether all the data has been copied After wards move the old directory and add a new one an empty mount point mv opt opt old mkdir opt Use an editor to add the new partitions in etc stab This could resemble the line in File B 1 Example B 1 Sample Line in etc fstab for an Additional Partition dev hdb1 opt ext 2 defaults 1 2 SUSE LINUX OVA XANI ISNS 301 302 Now shut down the computer and reboot f After rebooting check that dev hdb1 has actually been mounted to opt using the command mount If everything is working as desired remove the old data from opt old cd rm fr opt old 27 My computer crashed Can I just press the reset button without risking 28 anything If your computer no longer reacts to your mouse or keyboard this does not necessarily mean that your entire system has crashed Possibly one program is blocking the mouse or the keyboard but all other programs are still run ning If your machine can be accessed remotely serial terminal network log in elsewhere and abort the respective program with killall program name If this does not work try killall 9 program name If this is not possible try switching to another console using to kill the faulty process from
195. gt Configure KOrganizer This opens a dialog in which to enter your name and e mail address When working with the program the name is used to indicate who is the owner of a given to do item or event The e mail address is used to identify the owner of the calendar A user who is not the owner can read the calendar but not modify it Send copy to 6 1 Starting KOrganizer owner when mailing events should be enabled if you want to receive a copy of every e mail sent out by the program in your name to the attendees of an event For KOrganizer to save your scheduling items automatically when exiting check Enable automatic saving of calendar This also saves all changes automatically at a user definable interval To be prompted before any items are deleted enable Confirm deletes Under Time amp Date customize the defaults for working hours and appoint ments define the default alarm time and set your time zone KOrganizer switches between winter and daylight savings time automatically Under Fonts set your preferred font type and size for the different text fields of the program Fonts can be selected for the time bar the month view and under Agenda view for the day view week view and work week view Under Colors set the colors that should be used to highlight events to do items and other elements For instance define that to do items due on the current day should be dark red and that
196. h specific KDE programs so in general they cannot be used with other desk top applications The time synchronization conduit is special in that there is no user visible pro gram for it It is activated in the background with each sync operation but should only be enabled on computers that use a network time server to correct their own time drift When a synchronization is started the conduits are activated one after another to carry out the data transfer There are two different sync methods a HotSync oper ation only synchronizes the data for which any conduits have been enabled while a backup operation performs a full backup of all data stored on the handheld Some conduits open a file during a sync operation which means the correspond ing program should not be running at the given time Specifically KOrganizer should not be running during a sync operation 5 2 Conduits Used by KPilot The conduits used by KPilot can be enabled and configured after selecting Set tings gt Configure KPilot The following is a list of some important conduits Address Book This conduit handles the data exchange with the handheld s ad dress book The KDE counterpart for managing these contacts is KAddress Book Start it from the main menu or with the command kaddressbook For details about this program refer to Address Management with KAddress Book on page 99 5 1 How KPilot Works KNotes Memos This conduit allows you to transfe
197. h vi vi provides three operating modes In command mode keys are interpreted as command elements Insert mode interprets all keys as text entries Last line mode is used for more complex commands which are entered in the last line 21 4 The vi Editor Table 21 2 Simple Commands of the vi Editor ESC Changes to last line mode i Changes to insert mode characters appear at the current x cursor position a Changes to insert mode characters appear after the lt current cursor position gt A Changes to insert mode characters are added at the end of the line gt R Changes to command mode overwrites the old text a Y Changes to insert mode and overwrites each character a S Changes to insert mode the character where the cursor is positioned is replaced by the next entry you make e Changes to insert mode the rest of the line is replaced by the new text o Changes to insert mode a new line is inserted after the current one O Changes to insert mode a new line is inserted before the current one x Deletes the current character dd Deletes the current line dw Deletes up to the end of the current word cw Changes to insert mode the rest of the current word is overwritten by the next entries you make Undoes the last command Joins the following line with the current one Repeats the last command Changes to last line mode The most important commands in command mode are shown in Table Each c
198. hable form These resources include all manuals enclosed with your product online help for the installed applications and databases on hardware and software issues in connection with SUSE LINUX Using the SUSE Help Center When you start the SUSE Help Center for the first time from the main menu SuSE Help the view as shown in Figure A 1 on the following page is dis played The dialog window consists of three main areas Menu Bar and Toolbar The menu bar provides the main editing navigation and configuration options File contains the option for printing the cur rently displayed content Under Edit access the search function Go con tains all navigation possibilities Home home page of the Help Center Back Forward and Last Search Result With Settings gt Configure KDE Help Center gt Create Search Index generate a search index for all selected information sources The toolbar contains three navigation icons forward back home and a printer icon for printing the current contents Navigation Area with Tabs The navigation area in the left part of the window provides an input field for a quick search in selected information sources Details regarding the search and the configuration of the search function in the Search tab are presented in The Search Function of the SUSE Help Cen _ terJon page 295 The Contents tab presents a tree view of all available a
199. he current directory a Displays the size of each individual file h Output in human readable form s Displays only the calculated total size free option s The command free displays information about RAM and swap space usage showing the total and the used amount in both cate gories b Output in bytes k Output in kilobytes m Output in megabytes date option s Thissimple program displays the current system time If run as root it can also be used to change the system time Details about the program are available in date Processes top options s top provides a quick overview of the currently running processes Press H to access a page that briefly explains the main options to customize the program 21 3 Important Linux Commands ps option s process ID If run without any options this command displays a table of all your own programs or processes those you started The options for this command are not preceded by hyphen aux Displays a detailed list of all processes independent of the owner kill option s process ID Unfortunately sometimes a program cannot be terminated in the normal way In most cases you should still be able to stop such a runaway program by executing the ki11 command specifying the respective process ID see top and ps ki11 sends a TERM signal that instructs the program to shut itself down If this does not help the follow ing parameter can be used 9 Sends a KILL signal
200. he following options are available for determining the selection area Default A predefined selection of sources is searched All Allsources are searched None No sources selected for the search Custom Determine the sources to search by activating the respective check boxes in the overview Upon completion of the search configuration click Search The relevant items are then displayed in the view window and can easily be navigated with mouse clicks SUSE LINUX FAQ OVvA4 XANI ISNS This section provides answers to frequently asked questions 1 I am the only person using my computer Why do I need to log in Linux is a multiuser system The system relies on user names and pass words to identify different users If you chose the option auto log in dur ing installation you are automatically logged in to the system after boot ing the machine Only log in as root to make changes to your system in stalling software or changing configuration 2 Are the SUSE manuals also available as PDF or HTML files Our manuals are included on the CDs and are also available through the SUSE help center To start the help center press and enter the command susehelp The PDF files or HTML versions are avail able in the packages suselinux adminguide_en and suselinux userguide_en In the installed system go to the directory usr share doc manual suselinux adminguide_en or usr share doc manual suselinux userguide_en
201. hes To TuxPinguin lt tux example com gt Date Today 15 46 40 ul pee 3 5 Hi this is a test Tux Pinguin copo oz Figure 12 1 Main Window of KMail after Start Up The folder area to the left contains a list of your mail folders mail boxes indi cating the total number of messages and how many are still unread To select a folder simply click it The messages it contains appear in the top right frame The number of messages is also displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the appli cation window SUSE LINUX uooolddy ION Idy eur ION 137 The subject sender and time of receipt of each message are listed in header area to the right Click a message to select it and display it in the message window Sort the messages by clicking one of the columns subject sender date etc The contents of the currently selected message are displayed in the message frame of the window Attachments are depicted as icons at the end of the mes sage based on the MIME type of the attachment Use and to scroll through the pages of the message or use T and Q to scroll line by line These shortcuts are indicated to the right of the respective menu items in the main menu Messages can be marked with different status flags Change the status with Mes sage gt Highlight as You can use this feature to highlight important messages that you do not want to forget 12 6 Creating a New Mes
202. his could for example be used to upload the captured image onto an FTP server 16 5 3 Command Line gqcam can also be run without its graphical user interface This may be interest ing for instance for automatic surveillance controlled by a cron job This requires that all the necessary settings be passed to the application as parameters Run ning gqcam t JPEG s d webcam jpg saves the current image captured by the camera with the file name webcam jpg The option t defines the file for mat Possible values are JPEG PNG and PPM The command line switch s ac tivates the color correction The file name for saving is passed with the option d If more than one webcam is operated the name of the device must be passed If no device is given the default device dev video0 is used To capture an image from the second camera the option v dev videol must be added List all options with gqcam help SUSE LINUX UJO2Qq9M PUD Opol O9plA AL 213 K3b The KDE Burning Application K3b is a comprehensive program for writing data and audio CDs Along with the usual features the program offers some additional options that facilitate work especially in the field of multimedia Start the program from the main menu or by entering the command k 3b The main program features are described in the following sections PEPEE EE Maen awe ahs 216 TM 217 ayuu ds tbe 44 a 218 oa a ea 219 175 Writing ISO Images oo
203. iate the option for activating the keyboard shortcuts CMC and Cir for cutting and for pasting under the General tab To use this feature activate the entry Synchronize contents of the clipboard and the selection in Clip board Selection Behavior Subsequently use the mouse or the keyboard shortcuts to which you are accustomed Help This item opens a submenu from which to open the Klipper handbook send a bug report to the developers and view information about Klipper and KDE Quit If you click Quit a dialog is displayed asking whether Klipper should be started automatically the next time you log in If you click No start the program from the main menu the next time you want to use it If you click Cancel the program is not terminated 1 4 6 Monitoring Print Jobs Start KJobViewer from the main menu or with the command k jobviewer from the command line This program assists with monitoring print jobs Print jobs are placed in a queue from which they are sent to the printer consecutively As long as your jobs are not printed edit them with the Jobs menu or by clicking the respective icon See Figure I 5 on the facing page 1 4 Important Utilities File Jobs Filter Settings Help gt E Name Qo F State Owner Size KB Page s printl ps Completed 291 gv 3eb92946 1 Completed 333 1 E 1 M cry Ici Keep window permanent Max
204. ices is maintained at http www linux usb org A graphical user interface is not compulsory because gqcam can also run from the command line 16 5 Webcam Operation with gqcam 16 5 1 Operation Connect your camera to the USB port of your computer before starting gqcam Then run gqcam The current picture of your webcam is automatically shown in the upper part of the application window The lower part has sliders for adjust ing the brightness white balance contrast tint and color saturation according to your liking The brightness is automatically preset This feature can be set in General in File gt Preferences Filters features false color correction switches because some cameras swap the red and blue channels in transmission If you operate more than one webcam use File gt Open New Camera to switch to another camera Select the new device from the dialog that opens The first camera is attached to the device dev video0 the second is attached to dev videol and so on 16 5 2 Snapshots To take a snapshot with a camera click Snap Picture Select a file name and pic ture format in the dialog that opens Create a picture series with Camera Set Timer Set the capturing frequency in seconds or minutes along with the prop erties of the images in Set image information An optional script to run after ev ery capture event can be chosen with Run command after snap T
205. ick Save your settings are saved and used again for the following print jobs How ever if you click OK the settings only apply to the current job If you close the dialog with Cancel all changes are discarded After making all settings click Expand The second part of the window now 1 1 Desktop Components becomes visible Click the blue folder icon By default your home directory is dis played Select a file and confirm with OK You can also select the file by double clicking it The respective file then appears in the overview of the main window together with the name type and path specification Now click Print to send the job to the printer The job is placed in the queue and can be monitored with KJobViewer On the other hand if you click the document two additional but tons become active to the right Use the X button to remove the document from the selection or use the magnifying glass icon to display edit and save the file with Kwrite or OpenOffice org depending on the document type Afterwards simply close the editing program and click Print in the KPrinter dialog The printout will reflect any changes made to the document while editing doptseq Jay eut All KDE applications use KPrinter for printing For example if you click the printer icon in KWrite the KPrinter dialog appears The file to print is already pre selected 1 1 5 The Panel The panel at the lower edge of
206. igured e mail addresses To submit outgoing e mail on the local system select Sendmail For a remote server select SMTP Get the details from your ISP or server administrator For SMTP complete the other fields displayed after selec tion Click Next when finished By default the e mail address is used as the name to identify the account Enter another name if desired The field Make this my default account determines whether the account should be used as the default The default account is the e mail address initially selected for sending e mail Another account can be se lected in the message composition window if desired Click Next The time zone information from the next window is used for the calendar func tions It is important to select the correct time zone for using the appointment scheduling functions Click the dot on the map for a city in your time zone Se lection zooms the display to that area and a change can be made if desired When the correct time zone is displayed under Selection click Next In the next win dow click Finish to save the data entered Use Back to make changes 13 2 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs Evolution can import e mail from other e mail programs such as Netscape or KMail To do so select File gt Import For KMail or mutt select Import a sin gle file For Netscape select Import data and settings from older program
207. ing link then select Open Link in New Tab from the context menu The different documents are now directly available by clicking the different tabs arranged at the top of the main window As soon as you start using tabs an extra button appears to the left of the tab bar which allows you to open a new empty tab Press to achieve the same To close the currently active tab click the button with the X to the very right of the tab bar Right click a tab to open context menu that offers several related actions such as closing the tab or closing all other tabs SUSE LINUX JOSMOIG SM OIIZO JA SUL 119 b Appearance Navigator r When Navigator starts up display History Languages Q Blank page Helper Applications Home page Smart Browsing Q Last page visited Internet Search Tabbed Browsing r Home Page Downloads Clicking the Home button takes you to this page or group of pages b Composer P Mail amp Newsgroups Location http mozilla kairo at Choose File P Privacy amp Security Use Current Page Use Current Group 4 b Advanced o Offline amp Disk Space P r Select the buttons you want to see in the toolbars Y Bookmarks 7 Search O Go Y Print 7 Home Figure 10 2 Preferences 10 3 Preferences Many often needed browser settings are available in the dialog that opens when you select Edit Prefe
208. ing machine gives the number of stored messages You then have the choice of recording a new welcome message or listening to your stored messages Follow the instructions given The following table provides a brief overview of the menu items for remotely ac cessing messages It is recommended to carry a copy of it if you use the remote access frequently The commands can be entered at any time during the play back of the messages This means that an excessively long voice message can be skipped easily SUSE LINUX UoinpoolunuJuJoo2e 9 NASI 171 172 14 2 Usage Table 14 1 Commands for Message Playback Key Function 1 delete current message 4 skip to the next message 5 skip to the previous message 6 replay current message Part IV Multimedia Sound in Linux Linux offers a wide range of sound applications in various stages of develop ment This chapter provides an overview of a wide range of applications for vari ous multimedia tasks together with some technical background information Ap plications that are not part of the standard installation can be installed with YaST beats doxes etit is e Et A ead 176 152 NA A A CE e a e mn 176 a T 181 TQ C 186 155 TheJACK Audio Connection Kit 187 15 6 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity 188 oe 191 bea a oa ot dela an a 192 159 AlSAandMIDI rennes 193 15 10 MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card 198 15 11 AlsaM
209. ing typographical conventions are used in this book a etc passwd files or directories placeholder replace the character string placeholder including the angle brackets with the actual value PATH an environment variable 1s commands m user users Alf a key to press a File menu items buttons Acknowledgements With a lot of personal commitment the Linux developers continue to promote the development of Linux We would like to express our sincere gratitude for their efforts Without them this distribution would not exist Additional thanks go to Frank Zappa and Pawar Special thanks of course to LINUS TORVALDS Have a lot of fun Your SUSE Team Contents Part Configuration The KDE Desktop The KDE desktop offers an intuitive graphical interface The following sections show you how to make efficient use of KDE s features and how to customize the desktop to meet your personal needs This is followed by an introduction to the file manager Konqueror and a brief description of some small but useful utilities 11 Desktop Components o eee 6 1 2 Setting ees sou aire II Xaver Sys e e dd 13 13 Konqueror as a File Manager 20 1 4 ImportantUtilities ees 24 dopised 4d sul 1 1 Desktop Components The main components are the icons on the desktop and the panel at the bottom of the screen The mouse is your most important tool Click a symbol or an icon
210. ing you to change the paper format e g from A4 to letter or to select a different paper tray Changing trays is especially useful if one of the trays contains letterhead paper and another contains plain white paper SUSE LINUX _______ 9 10 General Image Text HP GL 2 Driver Settings LJ Page size A4 Paper type l Paper source Tray 2 r Orientation 34 p Duplex Printing Gy Portrait None C Landscape i 145 Long side E Reverse landscape j O Short side C Reverse portrait r Banners r Pages per Sheet Start none ol O2 End none O4 y Save Figure 1 2 Settings in KPrinter Under Orientation choose between Portrait and Landscape and whether the pages should be turned 180 degrees so that they are printed upside down To the right of Orientation specify the settings for two sided printing If None is se lected only one page is printed per sheet If you select Long side the front and back are printed like in a book With Short side the back is printed reversely and you must turn the sheet up to view the text correctly With Start End specify whether your document should have start or end banners such as con fidential or secret Under Pages per Sheet select to print two or four pages on one sheet For this purpose the pages are downsized accordingly If you cl
211. instead of a TERM signal This brings the specified process to an end in almost all cases killall option s processname This command is similar to k i11 but uses the process name instead of the process ID as an argument killing all processes with that name Network ping option s host name IP address The ping command is the standard tool for testing the basic functionality of TCP IP networks It sends a small data packet to the destination host requesting an immediate reply If this works ping displays a message to that effect which indicates that the network link is basically functioning c number Determines the total number of packages to send and ends after they have been dispatched By default there is no limitation set flood ping sends as many data packages as possible A popular means reserved for root to test networks i value Specifies the interval between two data packages in seconds Default one second nslookup The domain name system resolves domain names to IP addresses With this tool send queries to information servers DNS servers telnet option s host name or IP address Telnet is actually an Internet protocol that enables you to work on remote hosts across a network telnet is also the name of a Linux program that uses this protocol to enable operations on remote computers SUSE LINUX IOUS eut UM 8uptoM 277 278 Caution Do not use telnet over a network on which third parti
212. ion of two seconds after each track 17 3 Creating an Audio CD 17 4 Copying a CD Select Copy CD from the toolbar In the following dialog make the settings for the reading and writing device as shown in Figure 17 3 The options introduced above are also available here An additional function enables the creation of sev eral copies of the CD CD Copy and CD Cbning CD Reader Device TOSHIBA DVD ROM SD M1612 ll Speed Auto J i9 E Device Options Advanced Writing Mode Copy Mode Auto F o Normal Copy Clone Copy uouooiddy Buluing 3d Sul ae Options Temp Directory Simulate Write image file to RX Burnfree itmpikcle tux a Free space in temporary directory 28 5 GB C On the fly j Only create image R Remove image Or K3b Defaults J User Defaults J Save User Defaults Figure 17 3 Copying a CD SUSE LINUX 219 220 17 5 Writing ISO Images If you already have an ISO image go to Tools gt Write ISO Image A window opens in which to enter the location of the Image to Write K3b calculates a check sum and displays it in MD5 Sum If the ISO file was downloaded from the Internet this sum shows if the download was successful Use the Options and Advanced tabs to set your preferences To burn the CD click Write 17 6 For More Information Apart from the two main functions described a
213. ion Enter the server name and the login method for the LDAP server The default method is anonymous access Connecting to the Server Enter the port number and the security protocols SSL or TLS to use Searching the Directory Enter the search base the search range the search du ration and possibly a limitation of the displayed hits SUSE LINUX 159 160 Display Name In this last step enter the name under which the selected server should appear in the list Close the assistant with Next and Finish Upon completion of the configuration the new LDAP server appears in your contact list under Other Contacts and can be browsed for any entries 13 8 For More Information Evolution offers extensive internal help pages Use the Help menu to access this information For more information about Evolution refer to Ximian s web site at http www ximian com 13 8 For More Information ISDN Telecommunication Even in this age of the Internet and e mail traditional communication means like phone and fax are still important The communication package CapiSuite offers an ISDN based solution for a computer supported answering machine and fax The following chapter explains how CapiSuite works This is followed by a de scription of its configuration with YaST and a brief introduction to the usage of the system 141 Configuration eee 162 ES AA ees RA AERE e 168 uouooiunuJulooeje NASI
214. ion of their original size The application Ark can be used to man 1 4 Important Utilities Floppy drive Primary Size 3 5 1 44MB 3 o File system DOS A U m Quick format U Full f t D 6y Full forma aa z Xj Verify integrity Xj Volume label 2 Help O KDE Floppy G Quit 0 Figure 1 6 The Floppy Disk Formatter KFloppy age such archives It supports common formats such as zip tar gz tar bz2 lha rar and some others Start Ark from the main menu or from the command line with the command ark If you already have some compressed files move these from an open Konqueror window to the Ark window to view the contents of the archive To view an inte grated preview of the archive in Konqueror right click the archive in Konqueror and select Preview in Archiver Alternatively select File Open in Ark to open the file directly See Figure 1 7Jon the following page Once you have opened an archive perform various actions Action offers op tions such as Add File Add Folder Delete Extract View Edit With and Open With To create a new archive select File New Enter the name of the new archive in the dialog that opens and specify the format using Archive Format After confirming with Save or by pressing Enter Ark opens an empty window You can drag and drop files and directories
215. is successful a list of all retrieved server entries is displayed in a new window Select the key to include in your key ring and click Import See Figure 11 4 on the facing page Confirm the following message with OK then exit the key server dialog with Close The imported key then appears in the main overview of the key manager and is ready for use 11 2 2 Exporting Your Keys to a Key Server To export your key to one of the freely accessible key servers on the Internet se lect the Export tab in the key server dialog Designate the target server and the key to export by means of two drop down menus Then start the export with Ex port 11 2 The Key Server Dialog Found 1 matching keys Friendly Fred lt fred example org gt Key to import BCO2F4FE Cancel Figure 11 4 Hits and Import 6d2 ui uoudAI1ou3 11 3 Text and File Encryption KGpg also offers the possibility to encrypt text or clipboard contents Click the padlock icon and find the options Encrypt clipboard and Decrypt clipboard as well as the option for opening the integrated editor 11 3 1 Encrypting and Decrypting the Clipboard Files copied to the clipboard can easily be encrypted with a few clicks Open the function overview by clicking the KGpg icon Select Encrypt Clipboard and des ignate the key to use on the panel A status message about the encryption proce dure is displayed on the desktop The encrypted conten
216. is usually consists of the nickname or e mail address and the password you chose Complete the configu ration of the messenger account by clicking Finish Here You Can Manage All Your Accounts Protocol Account New v gt AS Behavior B guum Appearance Ici Y Ce a Help X Cancel Figure 1 11 Kopete Configuration Panels The next item in the configuration dialog is Appearance It influences how Kopete is displayed The tab Emoticons provides a selection of various types of smileys The tabs Chat window and Colors amp Fonts offer the possibility to adjust the appearance of the chat windows for communication with other participants Choose between the classic themes of the corresponding providers or to create a custom theme by adjusting the font or color to personal preference Adding Contacts Itis necessary to add contacts in order to chat with a participant If you have al ready created an account on another PC this data is readily imported and auto matically added to your contact list To create a contact entry manually click File gt Add contact 1 4 Important Utilities A new assistant appears automatically that will accompany you until completion However consider that must be online to add a contact to your list Adding Groups Access this with File gt Create New Group Name the group and confirm this with OK A new folder appears in th
217. isted in Table 1 The discus sion in this chapter is focused on Writer and Calc The other modules are only explained briefly A full description of each module is available in the online help described in Getting Help on the facing page Table 3 1 The OpenOffice org Application Modules OpenOffice org Writer Powerful word processor application OpenOffice org Calc Spreadsheet application that includes a chart utility OpenOffice org Draw Drawing application for creating vector graphics OpenOffice org Math Application for generating mathematical formulas OpenOffice org Impress Application for creating presentations 3 The OpenOffice org Quickstarter The Quickstarter is a convenient addition to the OpenOffice org suite After se lecting OpenOffice org Quickstarter from the main menu for the first time you are asked whether the quickstart function of the program should be enabled Do ing so can be useful if you intend to use OpenOffice org frequently and have sufficient RAM available When enabled the Quickstarter icon appears in the desktop panel at the lower right edge of the screen Right clicking the icon displays a menu like the one shown in FigureB 1 on the next page which gives access to a number of possibil ities directly start the individual OpenOffice org application modules quickly reopen the recently used files or create a new document from a template Cus tomize the Quickstarter settings by selecting Configu
218. itor such as joe by exporting the desired editor for example with the command export EDITOR joe Then execute visudo as root and append the following line at the end of the file etc sudoers ALL ALL ALL usr bin timidity Now all system users are permitted to run timidity in root mode with the command sudo timidity The password of the respective user is requested if more than five minutes passed since the last sudo command 15 5 The JACK Audio Connection Kit Using the JACK Audio Connection Kit packages named jack and qjackconnect applications can exchange audio data with each other and with the sound card This is only possible if the respective application has a JACK in terface JACK support has become a standard feature so there are many applica tions that have the needed interface To use JACK either start the graphical front end QJackCil or start the engine from the command line with jackd d alsa d hw 0 JACK was designed SUSE LINUX 187 188 File About Readable Clients Ports Writeable Clients Ports alsa pcm alsa pcm i capture 1 ee Out IDZ 1 bridge 25018 i monitor 1 Connect Disconnect Show All Ports Hide All Ports CPU load 12 87 Sample rate 48000 Figure 15 7 QJackConnect a Patchbay for Jack to achieve a low latency Therefore the engine should run with real time prior ity For more information read the file usr share doc packages jack README
219. l select the message to decrypt Enter your password when prompted KMail attempts to decrypt the message If it was encrypted with your public key KMail displays it in clear text If not you cannot read the e mail message KMail saves these e mail messages in encrypted form to prevent anyone from reading them without your password 12 11 5 Encrypting Messages To send an encrypted message to a recipient for whom you have the public key simply write the message in the Create Message window Before sending the message click the red key icon in the window s toolbar Now the message can be sent If KMail cannot find a key for the recipient a list with all available keys is shown Select the appropriate one from the list or abort the process KMail also informs you if errors occur during the encryption process You cannot read en crypted messages if you did not click Always encrypt to self in the Security tab 12 11 Encrypting Mail with PGP or GnuPG 12 12 For More Information If you encounter problems or simply want to learn more about KMail use the Help menu to read the program s help pages More detailed information is available on the KMail home page at http kmail kde org uoupolddy ION Idy eut ION SUSE LINUX 147 Evolution An E Mail and Calendar Program Evolution is a groupware suite created by Ximian It offers regular e mail features along with extended features like task lists and
220. l cameras sssss connecting SgtKam cias Konqueror directories changing ocx cadena estes seaerte CICL oriol iras A ette ems navigating 6 cece eee eee eee s Paths sibus obesse eem oot SLF CEUTE risas cai disks formatting ica eere Rad ei is download manager sssssss 26 drives mounting 66 eee cece eee eee eee 275 unmounting 6 eee eee ee eee 275 e mail applications Index Evolution 00 08 14911160 KMail 0 eee 13311146 editors c KWrite arrasada dore a E E ake aiecelwiand encryption ergonomics 2 1 eee eee cee a Evol tion xoc educere PUR TC address books attachments errre na ciao scalendatc s odi sigues configuring cesses contacts sese creating messages encryption Lee eee eee o zulllcpm tei pann aeaa zfolders ero ted ret importing mail A user anaia SA aeina anini aia a virtual folders F PAO Lt file managers Konqueror sssssss files iia archiving ssssssss comparing cece eee eee eee COPYING x csessons eres denies keen sdeleting cere ener ws formats O O ashel cine eat Re rh uncompressing HVICWING cuidara fonts installing o ooooocccccccccccnccccs formatting hard e rtr PHYS EPA Galas f e e are egens configuring 006 creating images m CTODpping iy ce eee ka
221. le consists of the three tabs Basic Filters and Mouse Before modifying settings activate Enable keyboard accessibility fea tures SUSE LINUX ______ 47 48 Features The keyboard accessibility functions can be deactivated automatically after a certain time Set an appropriate time limit measured in seconds with the slider The system can additionally provide audible feedback when the keyboard accessibility functions are activated and deactivated Enable Sticky Keys Some keyboard shortcuts require that one key is kept pressed constantly this applies to Alf or Shif while the rest of the shortcut is typed When sticky keys are used the system regards those keys as pressed after being hit once For an audible feedback generated each time a modifier key Ctrl or Alf is pressed activate Beep when modifier is pressed If Disable if two keys pressed together is selected the keys do not stick anymore once two keys are pressed simultaneously The system then assumes that the keyboard shortcut has been completely entered Repeat Keys Activate Repeat Keys to make settings with sliders for Delay and Speed This determines how long a key must be pressed for the auto matic keyboard repeat function to be activated and at what speed the char acters are then typed Test the effect of the settings in the field at the bottom of the dialog window Choose parameters that reflect your normal typing h
222. lect an address resource such as LDAP or IMAP Select the desired resource then enter the corresponding parameters After confirming with Ok the program connects to the resource and starts retrieving the address data from it 7 4 Searching Address Data To start the actual search enter your search term in the main window s input field The result of your search appears in the currently active view by default as a table Limit the search range by defining a category for the search term such as given name family name or phone number 7 5 Importing and Exporting Address Data File gt Import adds a contact present in another file or on another file system Export exports a contact in a certain format For example it is possible to trans fer addresses onto a mobile phone or create a vCard and send it via e mail 7 6 For More Information If you have questions or encounter problems when working with KAddressBook read more about the program by selecting the Help menu item SUSE LINUX xXoogsseJpDp v um jJueuje8Dub NA sseJppv 103 Part Ill Internet The Web Browser Konqueror Konqueror is not only a versatile file manager It is also a modern web browser If you start the browser with the icon in the panel Konqueror opens with the web browser profile 8 1 Starting Konqueror and Opening Web Pages 108 8 2 Saving Web Pages and Graphics 109 8 3 Enhanced Web Browsing
223. les can be distinguished in a console SUSE LINUX IOUS eut UM BUMJOM 259 260 6 Move Testfile into the subdirectory test with the command mv To speed this up use the expansion function just enter mv T and press Tab As long as there is no other file beginning with this letter in the directory the shell expands the file name and adds the string estfile Otherwise add a letter or two yourself and test each time to see whether the shell can now expand the name Finally type a space then test after the expanded file name and press to execute the command 7 At this point Test file should no longer be in the directory Check this by entering 1s again 8 To see whether the file has been successfully moved change into the direc tory test with the command cd test Now enter 1s again You should see Test file in the listing Change back to your home directory at any point by entering only cd 9 To make a copy of a file use cp For instance enter cp Testfile Testbackup to copy Testfile to Testbackup Once again the com mand 1s can be used to see whether both files are in the directory 21 1 4 Specifying Paths When working with files or directories it is important specify the correct path However you do not need to enter the entire absolute path from the root direc tory to the respective file Rather you can start from the current directory Ad dress your home directory directly with Accordingly there are two w
224. lide of the new pre sentation To complete your presentation enter a title and the text for each page When fin ished view the presentation by selecting Slide Show gt Slide Show To advance to the next page during the show click To exit from it press Esc Refer to the help system of OpenOffice org to learn more 3 8 2 Adding a Slide To add another slide to your presentation select Insert gt Slide This opens the dialog window shown in FigureB 11 on the facing page Enter a name for the slide and determine which of the predefined layouts to use Then click OK to insert the slide or Cancel to abort the procedure To use templates select File New gt From Template 3 8 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress Figure 3 11 Inserting Slides in Impress SUSE LINUX SLINS SIWO 8610 eoyjouedo SUI 75 The KWrite Text Editor KWrite can be used to write simple texts or lists Apart from these basic editing functions KWrite can also be used to view and edit different types of source and HTML code with syntax highlighting This chapter provides a brief overview of the main features of KWrite introducing the main menus and tools E Bee ae a 78 fee ee eae aes NE 79 43 TheEditMenu 0 000000 eee 80 Me tua Ge eae ee ee 81 4 5 The Bookmarks Menu 0004 81 D
225. lo height 78 mm A SIE Ho s se 304 Me iL Use custom gamma table Edit gt Ei O Final Scan Preview Scan Loading fileyhome tux kde share apps Scanlmages kscan_0001 jpeg 1766x1873 pixel 32 bit 2 E Figure 19 3 The Kooka Scanning Parameters Also use it to access a feedback channel for problems and wishes It also provides information about the version authors and license of Kooka and KDE 19 5 The Gallery The gallery window shows the default folder where Kooka stores all its image files An example is shown in Figure 19 4 on the next page To save an image to your personal home directory click the thumbnail to select it then select File gt Save Image Then enter your personal home directory and give the file a de scriptive name To add images to the gallery simply drag and drop them from Konqueror Start Konqueror navigate to the directory containing the images to add to the gallery and drag them with the mouse to a folder of the Kooka gallery SUSE LINUX _______ 231 232 RX Image Name Size Format Kooka Gallery 4 items E kscan_0001 jpeg 1766 x 1873 JPEG 762x811 JPEG skscan_0003 jpeg 63 0kB JPEG Skscan_0004 jpeg 181MB JPEG Figure 19 4 The Kooka Gallery 19 6 Optical Character Recognition If the character recognition module is installed documents can be scanned in lineart mode saved in the proposed format then processed for text recogni tion from the Image menu Pro
226. lude a status bar at the lower edge of its window The status bar would display the current line and column number the input mode and the save status of the document Show Path Tf this is enabled KWrite displays the file name of the loaded docu ment together with its complete path rather than just the file name in the window title bar E Configure Editor This opens a dialog with all the configuration options available for KWrite This includes the color scheme and the fonts used settings for indentation text selection and word wrap and shortcut and highlighting options The dialog also allows you to define a default view profile and integrate an external module for checking spelling Configure Shortcuts This opens a dialog in which to change the existing keyboard shortcuts or define custom shortcuts Configure Toolbars This opens a dialog in which to add and remove toolbar buttons 4 8 The Help Menu This menu gives access to the KWrite handbook Click What s This or use the shortcut Shiff FT to access context sensitive tooltips 4 9 Kate The editor Kate provides further possibilities It is based on the same editor com ponent as KWrite but can open and handle multiple files simultaneously A useful feature is syntax highlighting Both KWrite and Kate offer this feature It formats program code to make it more readable This can be activated in Extras syntax highlighting 4
227. ly true for OpenOffice org Writer but also for Open Office org Calc and OpenOffice org Impress You can open MS Excel files with OpenOffice org Calc Again you can save your documents as PDF files If you continue to use MS Office your can also save your spreadsheets in MS Excel formats then reimport them with the Microsoft program Export files by selecting File gt Save As then choosing the desired format If you have difficulties with the formatting try using the CSV comma separated value format which can be handled by both spreadsheet programs and should thus carry over all the information 3 3 3 From MS PowerPoint to OpenOffice org Impress If you have any PowerPoint presentations you can import them with OpenOf fice org Impress The program also allows you to export presentations to Macro media Flash and PDF formats 3 4 Changing the Global Settings Global settings can be changed by selecting Tools gt Options This opens the window shown in FigureB 2 on the following page A tree structure is used to display categories of settings OpenOffice org This entry covers various basic settings This includes your user data like your address and e mail important paths and settings for printers and external programs SUSE LINUX SLINS eoyjo 810 eoyouedo eu 61 62 B OpenOffice org User Data General ftander E Memory i 100 ES Prnt External Programs Paths
228. mands or necessary communication of language as low as 35 45 dB A is required This is the case for instance for specialized work scientific work or programming Furthermore the evaluation level of a maximum of 55 dB A is important If 70 dB A is measured for a quarter of an hour the noise in the remaining time should be less than or equal to 55 dB A 286 22 1 The Working Environment Workstations can be equipped with partitions sound absorbing floors ap propriately wallpapered walls curtains and other sound reducing features Loud working equipment such as matrix printers should be installed in sound absorbing cases The permissible noise levels for office equipment are determined in the DIN standards An air conditioner should not increase the normal noise level Strain caused by excessive noise can also be reduced by an organizational restructuring of work 22 2 Office Equipment 22 2 Buying a Screen If you already have poor sharpness of vision low quality screens can make things even worse Apart from eye problems tenseness fatigue and many other disorders can be caused The latest technological developments are triniton or black matrix screens and TFT flat screens Unfortunately flat screens are still relatively expensive There are extensive standards that regulate the readability of the depicted information When buying a screen it is recommended to study the extensive standards t
229. menu opens The kind of menu displayed depends on the file type and offers common actions such as Cut Copy Paste and Delete Use Open with to select the application with which to open the file from a list of suitable programs SUSE LINUX dop1seg 3d eut 23 24 The quickest way to perform many actions is the drag and drop method For example easily move files from one Konqueror window to another by simply dragging them there while pressing the left mouse button Subsequently you are asked whether the objects should be moved or copied 1 4 Important Utilities The following pages introduce a number of small KDE utilities intended to as sist in daily work These applications perform various tasks such as managing your keys for encrypting and signing files and e mail messages managing your clipboard formatting floppy disks compressing and decompressing diverse file archive types and sharing your desktop with other users 1 4 1 Creating an Image Gallery If you have a large collection of images in a directory you may find it difficult to manage them Konqueror can help you by creating an HTML file with thumb nails Open the respective directory in Konqueror and select Tools gt Create Image Gallery A dialog opens in which to specify the page title the number of thumbnails per line the background and foreground colors and some other details When you are finished select
230. mory eaters sluggish in their operation and occupy thirty megabytes on the hard disk That is why the idea behind Galeon is to devote itself just to one assignment the web and only the web Galeon implements the speedy Gecko engine of the Mozilla browser and integrates this into a functional user interface The applica tion loads quickly and is one of the fastest browsers available 9 1 Optimized for the Web 112 9 2 Efficient Surfing with Tabs 113 9 3 SmartBookmarks 113 9 4 SettingsandControls 0004 113 9 5 ForMore Informatiod 114 UO9S D2 JOSMOIG JSM SUL 112 File Edit View Tab Settings Bookmarks Go Tools Help Back gt Y d Home 9 Stoph oo Y rsuse comindex us html a THE LINUX EXPERTS Site Map Links Shop Conntrv Tanenac Y ES Search E SuSE Linux Operating System Consulting e SuSE Linux Support Business Customers Business Solutions Solutions gt Private Customers Figure 9 1 The Main Window in Galeon Galeon s most essential navigation tools are available in the first toolbar Next and Back flip through the history of visited Internet sites as in other browsers Reload updates the contents of a site Cancel stops a connection or transfer from taking place Zoom the magnification level of a document is usually scaled to 100 a 1 1 displa
231. mplement your own modifications retrieve the designations of keyboard events with the Xev program 15 9 3 Establishing Connections between MIDI Ports Eile Help Readable Ports 64 0 External MIDI 0 Writeable Ports 54 0 External MIDI O 72 0 External MIDI 1 80 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 0 81 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 1 82 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 2 83 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 3 129 0 Virtual Keyboard 130 0 Virtual Keyboard 131 0 MIDI Viewer 65 0 Emul0k1 WaveTable 65 1 Emul0k1 WaveTable 65 2 Emul0k1 WaveTable 65 3 Emul0k1 WaveTable 72 0 External MIDI 1 60 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 0 81 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 1 82 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 2 133 0 Virtual Keyboard 83 0 Virtual Raw MIDI 2 3 134 0 MIDI Viewer 131 0 MIDI Viewer 132 0 Client 132 132 1 Client 132 134 0 MIDI Viewer connect disconnect Figure 15 12 Connecting MIDI Ports and Status Display with kaconnect ALSA provides an efficient infrastructure for the connection of several MIDI ports Sound cards and MIDI programs provided these support the ALSA se quencer structure have one or several MIDI ports for communicating with each other These ports can be connected with the KDE program kaconnect or the command aconnect On start up kaconnect shows the readable and writable MIDI ports available on your system and the connection status To test the pro cedure start two MIDI programs with the commands vkeybd and aseqview For the connection between
232. mplimentary close D H First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 Heading 6 Heading 7 Heading 8 Heading 9 List Indent Marginalia Signature Text body Text body indent Figure 3 5 The Stylist for Writer fast if the formatting needs to be changed extensively and consistently Us ing this method also makes it much easier to try different layouts with the document Define the format of paragraphs pages and frames for a style and select fonts and numbering methods To assign a style to a paragraph select the style to use then click the paint bucket icon in the Stylist Click the paragraphs to which to assign the style Pressing Esc or clicking the paint bucket icon again turns off the function Easily create your own styles by formatting a paragraph or a character as desired Use the Character and Paragraph items in the Format menu to achieve the desired results In the Stylist click New Style from Selection to the right of the bucket symbol Enter a name for your style and click OK Now you can use the newly created style on other parts of the document Change details of the style easily by selecting it in the list right clicking and selecting 3 5 Word Processing with OpenOffice org Writer Modify from the menu This opens a dialog in which all the possible format ting properties are available for modification 3 5
233. mpty when it is started for the first time If various users want to receive faxes with CapiSuite it must be ensured that the associated phone numbers are all different and that all these numbers are also associated with the line to which the ISDN adapter is connected This is of impor tance if you concurrently use an ISDN PBX Note Use only the answering machine module if you intend to receive both fax messages and regular calls under one number as this module in cludes the functionality for recognizing and receiving fax messages See Configuring the Answering Machinejon page 165 To be able to send fax messages configure a suitable entry in the fax module but leave the field for incoming phone numbers empty Note Use the buttons under the list to edit or delete existing entries or create new en tries When editing or creating a dialog opens in which to enter or modify the following data User Here select the user for whom to activate the fax functionality Incoming fax messages and status reports will be sent to this user account SUSE LINUX uouooiunuJulooelel NASI 163 VaS IA e The fax system for one or t iy i A more users can be set up in ot Fax Machine Configuration this dialog Each user must have at least one unique fax number configured Refer to the telecommunication chapter in the manuals for further details User Table User FaxNumbers MSN Action StationI
234. must be deactivated Confirm the first filter with Apply The above filtering rule specifies that KMail passes only those messages to spamc that have a size less than 300 KB You may try other threshold values but keep in mind that with a higher threshold the processing time increases SpamAssassin then tests all messages for characteristics of spam and alters the message header by adding the line X Spam Status YES The second filter relies on this Add a second filter to the list and name it SPAMF ilter This filter moves the messages marked by SpamAssassin to the spam folder Select lt header field gt as the property and contains as the qualifier Enter X Spam Status YES in the corresponding text entry field Under Filter actions select file in folder with spam as the destination folder Confirm with Apply These two filters should be placed in the order described at the top of the list Any other filters can be placed below them Distinguishing Wanted and Unwanted Messages SpamAssassin ships with predefined rules that control the recognition of spam messages It is possible for SpamAssassin to miss a message occasionally but the program can be trained to lower the number of false negatives The util ity sa learn is included for this purpose If your messages are stored in the MailDir format refer to Mail Formats on page 134 run the following command sa learn spam dir Mail spam cur
235. n The properties of the rectangle such as its fill color can be modified with the following steps First activate the object with a single click This should enable the green handles on the rectangle s corners and edges which allow you to re shape and resize it Next open the context menu by right clicking After selecting Area a dialog opens in which to change various properties When you are done with your modifications click OK As an alternative method to change the fill color select one directly in the object bar at the top to the right of the paint bucket There are many more useful drawing objects available in the toolbar Use it to create circles ellipses lines and even 3D elements SUSE LINUX SLINS eoyjo 810 eoyouedo eu 73 3 8 Creating Presentations with OpenOffice org Impress 3 8 1 Creating Presentations with the AutoPilot To use Autopilot to create presentations select File gt AutoPilot gt Presenta tion With the AutoPilot define the basic structure of a presentation in three brief steps In doing so set backgrounds the output medium and various effects You can also import data from an existing presentation with the help of assis tants After completing the procedure by clicking Create Impress offers a number of templates for the page layout Select one that suits your purposes and enter a name for the first slide Then click OK to generate the first s
236. n KDE is loaded and appears as a clipboard icon in the panel View the contents of the clipboard by clicking this icon The Klipper context menu and the last seven entries also referred to as the history are displayed See Figure 1 4 on the next page If an extensive text was copied to Klipper only the first line of the text is displayed The most recent entry is listed on top and is marked as active with a black check mark To copy an older text fragment from Klipper to an application select it by clicking it move the mouse pointer to the target application then middle click As well as the contents of the clipboard the context menu features the following menu items Enable Actions If you click this a black check mark is displayed in front of it For example if you mark a URL with the mouse when actions are enabled a window opens enabling you to select a browser for displaying this URL Click Actions Enabled to disable this function Clear Clipboard History Deletes all entries from the clipboard SUSE LINUX doptseq Jay eut 27 28 kprinter README txt kprinter Enable Actions y Clear Clipboard History Configure Klipper Help gt Quit Alt Ctri X Figure 1 4 The Clipboard Klipper Configure Klipper This opens the Klipper configuration dialog Control the program with keyboard shortcuts or use regular expressions Check the Klipper handbook for details Former Windows users may apprec
237. n the toolbar Existing event items can easily be modified with the mouse One possibility is to change the start and end date or time by clicking the item s upper or lower edge then dragging it to the desired position In the day week and work week view directly move an item to another time by clicking it then dragging it to the new position You can also move events outside the time of the current view For in stance an item can be dragged to the date navigator to the left Even drag an item to the date navigator of another KOrganizer window 6 3 1 Events To schedule a new event select Actions gt New Event Enter the desired details Under Reminder specify the exact time minutes hours or days in ad vance at which the attendees should be reminded of the event If an event recurs specify the interval Another way to create an event at a specific point in the cal endar is to double click the corresponding field in one of the program s calendar views This opens the same dialog window as that available from the menu Specify the attendees of an event by entering their data manually in the dialog or by inserting data from the address book To enter such data manually select New To import data from the address book select Address Book then the corresponding entry from the dialog 6 3 2 Attendees Participants for a schedule item are listed under Attendees in the item view Sort the attendee li
238. ncludes a number of items for creating buttons logos and other things 20 7 Printing Images To print an image select File gt Print from the image menu If your printer is configured in SUSE it should appear in the list In some cases it may be nec essary to select an appropriate driver with Setup Printer Select the appropri ate paper size with Media Size and the type in Media Type Other settings are available in the Image Output Settings tab In the bottom portion of the window adjust the image size Press Use Original Image Size to take these settings from the image itself This is recommended if SUSE LINUX dINID eui uu soiudoio Buyoindiuny 249 Preview Printer Settings Image Output Settings Printer Named Printer Model PostScript Level 2 Setup Printer New Printer Media Size Letter M Dimensions Width 0 00 Height o o0 Media Type Standara y Media Source Standard y Ink Type Standard Resolution Standard Position Orientation Auto E Let oso Top to4 Right 875 Botom sss Right Border 225 Bottom Border ziz Center Vertically Both Horizontally Size Scaling FJ 72 0 E Scale by Percent Width 8 25 Units Inch Use Original i PPI Height 5 29 C cm Image Size Save Print and About Settings Save Settings X Cancel Figure 20
239. nd currently installed information sources Click the book icons to open and browse the individual categories uoiuojueuunoo pup d eH 294 View Window The view window always displays the currently selected con tents such as online manuals search results or web pages File Edit Go Settings Help ated Y Application Manuals Administration Y Development Y Online Resources Contents Search Gl SuSE HelpCenter Development Documentation for Developers o Bash Reference o Tools o Languages Libraries Administration o Linux Documentation o Hardware o System Application Manuals o KDE o Application Manuals Manuals of applications sorted as in start menu o Reference documentation Online Resources o SuSE Hardware Database o SuSE Homepage Figure A 1 The Main Window of the SUSE Help Center Contents of the SUSE Help Center The SUSE Help Center bundles useful information from various sources It con tains special documentation for SUSE LINUX User Guide and Administration Guide all available information sources for your workstation environment on line help for the installed programs and help texts for other applications Fur thermore the SUSE Help Center provides access to SUSE s online databases that cover special hardware and software issues in connection with SUSE LINUX All these sources can be searched comfortably once a search index has been gener ated
240. nder the Appointment tab enter the details for the appointment Select a category if de sired to ease searching and sorting later Optionally set for Evolution to provide a reminder before your appointment under the Reminder tab If the appoint ment occurs regularly set that under Recurrence Click Save and Close after all settings are made The new appointment is then shown in your calendar 13 5 2 Scheduling a Meeting To schedule a meeting with other people click New Appointment then select Actions gt Schedule Meeting Enter information as for an appointment Under Meeting add attendees For those in your Contacts click Invite Others and select attendees from the dialog When finished click Save and Close The atten dees will be sent an e mail about the scheduled meeting SUSE LINUX WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD pub ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 157 158 This system can also be used to schedule a time that fits all attendees or to reserve resources For more information about the scheduling functions refer to the inter nal help 13 5 3 Adding Tasks Evolution helps to keep track of your tasks To add a new task to your list click New Task Enter summary information due and start dates and a description Enter task status and other information under Details Click Save and Close to add the task to your list Double click the task to reopen the dialog and m
241. ndow 8 5 Java and JavaScript Do not confuse these two languages Java is an object oriented platform independent programming language from Sun Microsystems It is frequently used for small programs applets which are executed over the Internet for things like online banking chatting and shopping JavaScript is an interpreted scripting language mainly used for the dynamic structuring of web pages for ex ample for menus and other effects Konqueror allows you to enable or disable these two languages This can even be done in a domain specific way which means that you can permit access for some hosts and block access for others Java and JavaScript are often disabled for security reasons Unfortunately some web pages require JavaScript for correct display 8 6 For More Information For any questions or problems that arise when working with Konqueror refer to the application s handbook which is available from the Help menu Konqueror also has a web page which is located at http www konqueror org 8 5 Java and Javascript The Web Browser Galeon Recently the widely used web browser has been transformed into a real jack of all trades The fact that today s Internet applications feature such depth in in tegration and are heavily integrated into their corresponding desktop environ ments is almost taken for granted Users of outdated machines soon feel the ef fects of this development All around browsers are often me
242. ne cie eet e gees editing images Hess rd image modes A ve ode t bene nias 48 A x eite openingimages s s Sprung csaere eerte a aeree retouching images savingimages ssssss scaling images 005 Sel cting simon A sigan e p RP EIU templates isses eee etre mens A west sb ke configuring aaki Kerer accessibility background Bol 47 keyboard ooooocooccccccoccccconons keyboard shortcuts 49 sens irs eA waa d RTT R oe kp Screensaver nonon eee eee eee eee system alerts themes aa inn alba stoolbats eR Verre DYTDPg windows sessseseesee desktop menu ssssssssse dictionary ooccoocccccocccccoroncoo ISK air DVDS recae Stats ae file manager File Roller gphoto2 iccsssese ess rra 225 installing eceseek een eren sian aa ss 222 graphics zediting corea het eee 2351251 fil formats a sese sed ec sses 241 s Konqueror 0c cece cence ees EPIX EE STOSIZING po urs E Aia e V bad camera selection installing castin raiar onori SUNZIP aa SAND ass Vues dieere a tea PRO d e e Ra H halt iia cr etr re eter x 278 hard disks A he ct ert Ree hne 301 defragmenting s 300 hardware SUPPONE errar e MAD PABOS linares tirantes OpenOffice org 66 cece ee SUSE Help Center Internet connections ce
243. ng 1s help display all the options for the 1s command Also use the 1s command to view the contents of other directories To do so the directory must be specified as a parameter For example to see the contents of Desktop enter 1s 1 Desktop 21 1 2 Files and Directories To use the shell efficiently it is really useful to have some knowledge about the file and directory structures of a Linux system You can think of directories as 21 1 Introduction to Bash electronic folders in which files programs and subdirectories are stored The top level directory in the hierarchy is the root directory referred to as This is the place from which all other directories can be accessed The home directory contains the directories in which the individual users can store their personal files Figure 21 1 shows the standard directory tree in Linux with the home directories of the example users xyz linux and tux The direc tory tree of a Linux system has a functional structure that follows the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard The following list provides a brief description of the standard directories in Linux Cin boos MEE Tb Soin Fost op prex Gn Camp usc as c ita ta 07 Cox Linux tux X1 IR6 bin etc Qib local sbin share Bc bin lib man bin ib man Figure 21 1 Excerpt from a Standard Directory Tree root directory starting point of the directory tree home private directori
244. ng CDs or DVDSs Thus a normal user would not be able to create CDs as it would be too dangerous to grant all users direct access to all devices A possible solution to this problem is the setuid mechanism setuid set user ID is a special file at tribute that instructs the system to execute programs marked accordingly under a specific user ID Consider the cdrecord command rwxr x 1 root root 281356 2002 10 08 21 30 usr bin cdrecord Set the setuid bit with the command chmod u s usr bin cdrecord Then assign the cdrecord program to the group users with the command chgrp users usr bin cdrecord The following access permissions are granted rws x 1 root users 281356 2002 10 08 21 30 usr bin cdrecord By means of the setuid bit all users belonging to the group users can use the program In effect this means that the program is executed as root Caution Setting the setuid bit for a program makes your computer more vulner able to attacks Only do this in exceptional cases when you know the program well and are aware of the potential risks Caution 21 2 Users and Access Permissions 21 2 4 The setgid Bit The setuid attribute applies to users However there is also an equivalent prop erty for groups the setgid attribute A program for which this attribute was set runs under the group ID under which it was saved no matter which user starts it Therefore in a directory with the setgid bit all newly cre
245. ng source This internal loopback capture can be activated in the AC97 standard by selecting the Mix control as recording source 15 2 7 The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 envy24control is a mixer application for sound cards using the Envy24 ice1712 chip Start this mixer with SUSE gt Multimedia gt Sound or from the com SUSE LINUX 179 180 Monitor Mixer Patchbay Router Hardware Settings Analog Volume About Digital Mixer PCM Out 1 PPCM Out 2 PPCM Out 3 PCM Out 4 PCM Out 5 PPCM Out 6 Let Right Let Right Let Right Let Right Len Right Let Right Mute mute mute mute mute mute mute mute Mute Mute wute iMate Left Right Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Reset Peaks Figure 15 3 Monitor and Digital Mixer of envy24control mand line with envy24control amp The flexibility of the Envy24 chip can re sult in varying functionalities in different sound cards The latest details on this sound chip are available in usr share doc packages alsa alsa tools envy24control Monitor and Patchbay of envy24control The Monitor Mixer of envy24control shows the signal levels that can be mixed digitally in the sound card The signals designated as PCM Out are generated by applications that send PCM data to the sound card The signals of the analog inputs are shown under
246. nience and security However if you use the browser for online banking you should definitely not have the cor responding password stored by Mozilla Advanced Often web pages are not only written in plain HTML Many sites also use JavaScript or Java to produce some special effects As a general rule it is recommended to turn off Java Under Scripts amp Plugins you should also turn off JavaScript at least for Mail amp Newsgroups Other di alogs available under this entry are related to the browser s Cache and to the Proxies used by it SUSE LINUX 121 The settings in the Cache dialog depend on the specific circumstances with which the browser needs to cope but the default 4096 kB size of the Mem ory Cache is often too small A cache is a temporary storage area used for the files fetched from the network so they can be reused 122 _ 10 3 Preferences Encryption with KGpg KGpg is an important component of the encryption infrastructure on your sys tem With the help of this program generate and manage all needed keys use its editor function for the quick creation and encryption of files or use the applet in your panel to encrypt or decrypt by dragging and dropping This chapter covers the basic functions needed for daily work with encrypted files 11 1 Key Management eee 124 11 2 The Key Server Dialog 127 113 Text and File Encryption
247. nswering Machine User Preferences User Select the system user for whom the answering machine should be con figured One or more fax numbers are assigned to each registered user In coming calls to these numbers are then sent to the user as e mails Phone Numbers Set the phone numbers for which messages should be recorded for the user Faxes can also be sent to the declared phone num bers as the answering machine has an automatic fax recognition feature Separate multiple numbers with commas Response Time This value defined in seconds determines after how much time the answering machine should answer an incoming call A value can be se lected from the list or entered Duration Determines the maximum recording time for the answering ma chine the maximum duration of a recorded incoming call in seconds SUSE LINUX uoiooiunuJulooeje NASI 167 168 This value is usually of secondary importance as the recording is usually terminated when the caller hangs up However to avoid extensive record ings this value should be set to a reasonable time such as two minutes 120 seconds Action The answering machine features various processing options for incom ing messages The default setting MailAndSave records a message saves it in the system and delivers it to the user by e mail The SaveOn1y op tion can be chosen if the reception of e mails is not desired It merely saves the message to the hard disk This
248. nus sn 229 19 5 Th Gallery 2 fa O aude eos adde te ide ea a 231 P 232 20 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 235 TECTUM 236 202 Starting The GIMP s scs scssi mei a 0000000000 0008 236 ba wd GEA Ee ERAS REESE EE 236 20 2 2 The Default Windows llle 237 203 Getting Started in GIMP lee 239 A ki e 239 SUSE LINUX xiii 20 3 3 Opening an Existing Image o 240 L rr 240 pi a a a a ea a RE a 240 oe Both Aide E E E aro oe den 242 r m 242 WU te be S n SUN O 243 BS Adee ee an 245 Dk eRe ed Y E e Aa 247 CL 248 Oe E eas Sees eo ee 248 eB Mee SR do aR oe ee ee Re OR ea ae 248 SS bet Se Geb a a Ed a we ae 249 E ee 249 TI 249 208 ConfiguringGIMP o o ooo ooo o e 251 Er deer fe Gees Ua pus eon gs ir TUR e eased 251 C 251 ot PA 0 93 ee ER eRe oa d ES A 251 253 21 Working with the Shell 255 211 Introduction to Bash 2 200022 ee 256 2111 Commands len 256 211 2 Files and Directories o 256 211 3 BashFunctions llle 259 A O 2 260 213 Wild Cards ocur cosmo RRR a 261 Tm 262 ek gk A a eani DTI 262 Xv _____ Contents 21 1 8 Archives and DataCompression 21 19 mtools 21 1 10 Cleaning Up 21 2 Users and Access Permissions 21 21 File System Permissions ooo o 21 22 Modifying File Permissions
249. o avoid a wrong purchase One thing is certain a good screen is usually expensive The normal tube screens do not last forever They only retain their focus and con trast for a few years All depicted characters should be sharply defined and clearly legible up to the edges of the screen A positive representation dark characters on a light background as in a book is recommended As the depicted characters must be large enough a 17 inch monitor is rec ommended at least for graphical user interfaces like KDE For the pro cessing of CAD layout and graphics it should be 21 inches It is especially important that the screen does not flicker In concrete terms the minimum sync frequency with 15 inch monitors should be at least 73 Hz However 85 Hz is recommended For larger screens such as 21 inch 100 Hz is a good value SUSE LINUX 92DJ O 10M SUI ui SOILIOUOBIJ 287 Luminosity and contrast should be variable The focus of the characters should not differ with adjustments of brightness or contrast The image should be free from distortion and show no color errors To avoid reflex glare a good antireflective coating of the screen surface is recommended The screen should be rotatable and inclinable A vertical adjustment is rec ommended Colors make the displayed information easier to comprehend However the display of colors can also be straining for the eyes because different colors are refracted differ
250. odularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor 200 15 12 NoteEdit and MIDISequencers 205 xnu ui PUNOS 176 15 1 The ALSA PCM Types As of version 0 9 of the Advanced Linux Sound Architecture ALSA the concept for PCM devices was fundamentally modified and expanded PCM is an acronym for Pulse Code Modulation and designates the digital output interfaces when relating to sound cards The user can influence the way ALSA addresses the sound card by selecting a specific PCM type The main PCM types are hw and plughw To understand the difference between the two types consider how a PCM de vice is opened It must be opened with specific settings for at least the following parameters sample format sample frequency number of channels number of periods previously referred to as fragments and size of a period For example an application may attempt to play a WAV file with a sample frequency of 44 1 kHz although the sound card does not support this frequency In this case ALSA can automatically convert the data in the plug in layer to a format supported by the sound card The conversion affects the following parameters sample format sample frequency and number of channels Activate the plug in layer by selecting the PCM type plughw If the PCM type hw is selected ALSA tries to open the PCM devices directly with the parameters required by the application The complete designator for a PCM device consists of the PCM
251. of its development was to make the user interface more uniform while streamlining the various aspects of the look and feel The basic components for window management and other components enable data sharing among various applications and are based on a uniform operating concept and help system 2 1 The Desktop 2 224240 mk REESE eee 42 2 2 Sete ao 3 xosc ku eG Ripe kon ee S E as 44 23 File Management with Nautilus 49 24 Important Utilities eee 5 dopiseq INONI SUL 42 2 1 The Desktop The most important elements of the GNOME desktop are the icons on the desk top the panel at the lower border and the desktop menu The mouse is your most important tool 2 1 1 The Icons By default the desktop features three symbols your personal folder the start di alog for the configuration of the desktop and the trash can If you double click your personal folder Nautilus starts and displays your home directory More in formation about the use of Nautilus is available in File Management with Nautilus on page 49 All files deleted with Nautilus are sent to the trash can Right clicking an icon displays a menu offering file operations like copying cut ting or renaming Selecting Properties from the menu displays a configuration dialog The title of an icon as well as the icon itself can be changed with Use cus tom icon The Emblems tab offers the possibility to add graphical descriptive s
252. ommand can be preceded by a number specifying on how many objects the fol lowing command should operate Delete three words at once by entering 3dw SUSE LINUX ______ 279 280 The command 10x deletes ten characters after the cursor position and 20dd deletes twenty lines The most important commands in last line mode are shown in Table Table 21 3 Complex Commands of the vi Editor w filename e filename 21 4 The vi Editor exits Vi without saving any changes saves as filename saves the modified file and exits the editor edits loads ilename undoes the last edit command Ergonomics in the Workplace This chapter is a short discussion of the ergonomic issues involved in the layout of computer workplaces This text should not be seen as a substitute for studying the respective standards No citations from these are included here and footnotes with references to other literature are completely omitted to preserve readability The items referred to in each section are mostly gathered from German literature and are almost always based on regulations and policies in the Federal Republic of Germany This information is still useful in designing an ergonomic work area 221 The Working Environment 282 222 Office Equipment o ooo o 287 223 Links and Literature 291 3PIAAJOM SUL Ul SOILUOUVOBIJ 282 22 1 The Working Environment If ergonomics speciali
253. on If you are uncertain about which options your server provides try Check What the Server Supports 12 4 3 Configuring the Appearance of KMail Under Appearance customize KMail according to your preferences Use the Fonts tab to configure the fonts for the various displays such as the message text and first level quoted text To do this activate Use custom fonts 12 4 Configuring KMail To customize the colors activate Use custom colors in the Colors tab Double click an entry to access a dialog in which to select the colors The Layout tab of fers options for splitting the KMail window and for displaying a MIME tree A MIME tree shows all the attachments to a message The Header tab provides options for general settings like displaying the file size or encryption symbols Also customize the date display and message grouping Profiles is responsible for the configuration of the appearance Some standard profiles are provided with the program like those for users who prefer high con trast Selecting a profile overwrites the current layout settings 12 5 Using KMail After starting KMail displays its main window By default the main window consists of three sections File Edit View Go Folder Message Tools Settings Help 289052090008 Folder w Subject Receiver Date Order of Arrival w Local Folders E inbox ga sent mail 8 trash f drafts 2y Searc
254. one last clicked Change this behavior by activating Select windows when the mouse moves over them If desired activate Raise selected window after an interval and adjust the latency time with the slider This activates a win dow only when the cursor was placed within the window for a time exceeding the set latency Application windows can be shaded by double clicking the title bar leaving only the title bar visible This saves space on the desktop and is the default behavior It is alternatively possible to set windows to maximize when the title bar is double clicked With the radio buttons select the modifier key to press for moving a window The possible choices are Ctrl Af and the key 2 2 6 Background Determine a background for your desktop By default the changes made here are applied to all virtual desktop If you do not want any background picture click No Picture and define a background style The drop down menu offers a 2 2 Settings horizontal gradient a vertical gradient or no gradient at all Use Color to define the desired colors in the color editor To use an image file as a background picture drag it from the file manager and drop it in Select picture Alternatively click Select picture to open a dialog in which to select the desired image Picture Options determines what processing steps should be applied to the se lected image to adapt it optimally to the current scre
255. ons are necessary for receiving fax messages As soon as a fax is received for a number assigned to a user the message is stored in the system and delivered to the user as an e mail with a PDF attachment PDF is a common exchange format for documents and can be read in virtually all operating systems with Acrobat Reader from Adobe For backup purposes every document received is also stored on the hard disk in var spool capisuite users lt username gt received This direc tory can be accessed if anything goes wrong during the e mail transmission of if an e mail message was accidentally deleted More information can be found in the CapiSuite documentation in usr share doc packages capisuite manual index html The command line tool capisuitefax is available for sending faxes It accepts one or more target fax numbers and one or more documents in the PostScript for mat This format is generated by most Linux applications when printing to a file capisuitefax supports parameters such as the following hor help Returns a short summary of valid parameters d number or dialstring lt number gt This parameter declares the target number to which the fax should be sent qor quiet capisuitefax usually generates a few informative messages This option suppresses this and only allows the display of possible error messages The following command would send the two documents document 1 ps and document2 ps to the target number 089123
256. opens First try to autodetect the camera with Auto Detect If this fails browse the list for your model If your camera model is not included in the list try an older model Normally this should work The path to your image folders the location where your photographs are saved can be specified in the same dialog under the General Settings tab You can also determine the size of the thumbnails the way file names are displayed and some other settings After your camera has been detected correctly and you have configured the pro gram as desired confirm with OK The name of your camera is then displayed at the bottom left in the main window Double click it or select Camera gt Con nect to connect Digikam to your camera The thumbnails are displayed to the right Right click the image to open a pop up menu with which to view save or delete the image or view its properties Select all photographs to download from the camera by pressing the left mouse button or clicking individual photographs with Shift pressed Selected pho tographs appear with inverted colors Drag the selected photographs to the de sired directory Digikam then downloads the photographs and saves them in the selected directory 18 6 For More Information For more information about using digital cameras with Linux refer to the follow ing web sites a http digikam sourceforge net Information about Digikam a http www gphoto org Inf
257. or tar gz If it was com pressed using bzip2 the ending is t ar bz2 Application examples can be found in Archives and Data Compression on page locate pattern s The locate command can find in which directory a specified file is located If desired use wild cards to specify file names The program is very speedy as it uses a database specifically created for the purpose rather than searching through the entire file system This very fact however also results in a major drawback locate is unable to find any files created after the latest update of its database The database can be gen erated by root with updatedb updatedb options s This command performs an update of the database used by 1ocate To include files in all existing directories run the program as root It also makes sense to place it in the background by appending an ampersand amp so you can immediately continue working on the same command line updatedb amp find option s With find search for a file in a given directory The first argument specifies the directory in which to start the search The option name must be followed by a search string which may also include wild cards Unlike 1ocate which uses a database find scans the actual direc tory Commands to Access File Contents cat option s file s The cat command displays the contents of a file printing the entire contents to the screen without interruption n Numbers the output on the lef
258. or all other users The read permission is set with 4 the write permission with 2 and the permission for executing a file is set with 1 The owner of a file would usually receive a 7 the sum of all permissions IOUS eut ULM BUMJOM gzip parameters file s This program compresses the contents of files using complex mathematical algorithms Files compressed in this way are given the extension gz and need to be uncompressed before they can be used To compress several files or even entire directories use the tar com mand d Decompresses the packed gzip files so they return to their original size and can be processed normally like the command gunzip taroptions archive file s tar puts one or more files into an archive Compression is optional tar is a quite complex command with a number of options available The most frequently used options are Writes the output to a file and not to the screen as is usually the case c Creates a new tar archive r Adds files to an existing archive t Outputs the contents of an archive u Adds files but only if they are newer than the files already contained in the archive x Unpacks files from an archive extraction SUSE LINUX 273 274 z Packs the resulting archive with gzip j Compresses the resulting archive with bzip2 v Lists files processed The archive files created by tar end with tar If the tar archive was also compressed using gzip the ending is tgz
259. ormation about gPhoto gPhoto2 and gPhoto2 compatible GUIs http www thekompany com projects gphoto Information about Kamera a KDE front end for gPhoto2 m http www stud uni karlsruhe de urc8 GnoCam Information about GnoCam SUSE LINUX xnur PUD SOIOLUDD JOLIBIG 225 Kooka A Scanning Application Kooka is a KDE application for scanning This chapter explains the user interface and the functionality of the application d Sono e ERU ie d Deis dias d 228 ER EDEN PIC 228 Fr E RN 228 194 The Menus 229 19 5 The Gallery 6 ena oh ewe rs e e oed 231 19 6 Optical Character Recognition 232 uo Daddy Guiuupog y PAOOY 228 19 1 The Kooka Window Start Kooka from the main menu or enter the command kooka When started Kooka opens a three frame window with a menu bar to the upper left and a tool bar directly below it All windows can be freely readjusted or rearranged with the mouse It is also possible to completely detach single frames from the Kooka window for deliberate placement on the desktop To move the frames click and drag the thin double line right above the frame Any frame except the main win dow can be placed within any other frame aligned to the left right top bot tom or centered Centered windows have the same size are stacked and can be brought to the foreground with tabs The Image Viewer and the Scan Preview frames share a window by default Tabs
260. our own profiles by selecting Manage View Profiles In addition you can specify individual keyboard shortcuts with Configure Shortcuts customize the toolbar with Configure Toolbars and configure global settings for the file manager with Configure Konqueror Window The Window menu allows you to split the main window horizon tally and vertically It also allows you to manage the tabbed subwindows within the main window by opening a new tab or closing a tab duplicating an existing tab or detaching a tab into a separate window Help Under the Help menu access the Konqueror handbook or the What s This function Normally this function can also be accessed with the ques tion mark symbol at the top right in the title bar The mouse pointer is then displayed with a question mark If you click an icon a brief help text is dis played if there is one available The Help menu also provides a short in 1 3 Konqueror as a File Manager troduction to Konqueror and the possibility to report bugs and other con cerns to the developers About Konqueror and About KDE provide infor mation about the version license authors and translators of the project 1 3 2 The Toolbar The toolbar provides quick access to frequently used functions that can also be accessed via the menu If you let the mouse pointer rest above an icon a short de scription is displayed Right click a free space
261. our workstation you can blank your screen or start a screensaver Access to the session can only be regained with a password To unlock enter your normal login password Locking the screen ensures that others cannot read or manipulate your documents or e mail messages Logout User You can log out from the system by means of this menu item How ever first you will be asked what should happen after the logout If you select Login as different user the login screen is displayed allowing you or another user to log in to the system You can also shut down and turn off the computer or shut it down and reboot immediately Confirm your selec tion with OK or remain logged in by clicking Cancel 1 1 Desktop Components 1 2 Settings The KDE desktop can be customized according to your preferences and needs Control Center in the main menu opens the configuration dialog for your KDE desktop The following section introduces a number of modules 1 2 1 Peripherals This opens the configuration dialogs for the mouse keyboard and printer admin istration doptseq Jay eut Keyboard Keyboard Repeat Keeping a key pressed causes the associated character to be printed repeatedly as long as the key is pressed The option is activated by default NumLock on KDE Startup Here determine whether the number pad of your keyboard should be active when KDE is started Key Click Volume If you want to hear a sound when a key is clicked
262. p rane a een ets ance ene gs 81 AAA a ee ae 82 4 8 TheHelpMenu ooo o 82 49 Kate sooo o oo wo a ee A 82 JOPI 1xe ei Mo SUL 78 4 1 Starting KWrite Start KWrite from the main menu or using the command kwrite The command can be entered on the command line together with the name of the file to open As well as using the menu bar the toolbar and a number of shortcuts you can right click the opened document to access a context menu providing basic editor functions KWrite supports the drag and drop functions of KDE This means that you can simply drag documents with the mouse from one application into another or paste data from the clipboard described in The Clipboard Klipper on page 27 To edit a text file for which there is an icon on the desktop click the icon with the left mouse button and hold the button while dragging it into the editor window You can now edit the file as usual Paste text from the clipboard by middle clicking To edit or view the source code of an HTML page drag the URL into the editor window of KWrite keeping the left mouse button pressed index html KWrite 3 meme Eile Edit View Bookmarks Tools Settings Help Q5 Q ria RAMA lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC w3C DTD HTML 4 0 Transitional EN http www w3 org TR htm14 loose dtd gt 2 lt html gt 3 lt head gt 4 lt link rel SHORTCUT ICON href favicon ico title external favicon ico gt 5 lt title g
263. page ad dresses you can also bookmark any directories of your local disk in this way To create a new bookmark in Konqueror click Bookmarks Add Bookmark Any bookmarks added previously are included as items in the menu It is a good idea to arrange the bookmark collection by subjects in a hierarchical structure so that you do not lose track of the different items Create a new subgroup for your bookmarks with New Directory Selecting Bookmarks gt Edit Bookmarks opens the bookmark editor Use this program to organize rearrange add and delete bookmarks SUSE LINUX JOJ3NPUOyY JOSMOIG SM SUL 109 110 If you are using Netscape or Mozilla as additional browsers it is not necessary to recreate your bookmarks File gt Import Netscape Bookmarks in the book mark editor enables you to integrate your Netscape and Mozilla bookmarks into your most current collection The reverse is also possible via Export as Netscape Bookmarks Change your bookmarks by right clicking the entry A pop up menu appears in which to select the desired action cut copy delete etc When you are satisfied with the result save the bookmarks with File gt Save To save your bookmark list and have instant access to it make your bookmarks visible in Konqueror Select Settings gt Show Bookmark Toolbar A bookmark panel is automatically displayed in the current Konqueror wi
264. ple are involved specify their details under Attendees The created to do item is then automatically included in the left list under To do items The Summary column in this list shows the description Priority shows the value selected 6 3 4 Categories To manage your schedule group events and to dos according to certain cate gories Assign the scheduling items to one or several categories for instance if one of your items is related to job training you could assign it to both Business and Education Categories can be assigned in the dialogs for the creation of new SUSE LINUX Jeziub81Oy ui Bullnosyuos 95 96 General Attendees Recurrence Attachments Organizer niemand nirgendwo Name Email Role Status ASVI tux example com Particip Needs Action x Name Tux Pinguin New Email tux example com Remove Role Participant zj E Select Addressee Status Needs Action 3 C Request response _ Load Template Save as Template v ok Vu Apply 9 Cancel Figure 6 4 Entering Attendee Details events and to dos after selecting Categories Create additional categories with Edit Categories 6 4 Printing Selecting File gt Print opens a dialog in which to define the calendar pe riod to print and the type of view to use To specify the period enter the dates by hand or use the calendar available from the d
265. pressed or by using the Select menu View Use the View menu to change views If a directory has many objects in it the text view or the tree view may be more efficient To view HTML pages activate Use index html If a directory contains a file with this name Konqueror loads and displays it To influence the way in which the main window displays directory con tents use the items Icon Size 5how Hidden Files Sort and Preview In addition use Configure Background to set the main windows s back ground to a certain color or use an image for it Go The Go menu contains the navigation functions Up Back Forward and Home Page However the same functions can be accessed more quickly and conveniently through the toolbar You can also call applications from this menu and open all folders that have an icon on the desktop In the lower part of the menu find a list of the recently viewed directories or links Bookmarks Bookmarks can be made for Internet addresses URLs and paths to specific files or directories on your host If you select Add Bookmark the current content of the location bar is saved as a bookmark To access this SUSE LINUX doptseq Jay eut 21 location simply click this bookmark For practical reasons arrange book marks in folders The SUSE folder already exists This folder contains book marks of important SUSE web pages Edit
266. previous address then hit to complete it automatically Print prints the current page The downward arrow to its right also gives access to a print preview of the document To the very right the navigation toolbar dis plays the Mozilla logo which is animated as long as the browser is transferring data 10 1 3 The Personal Toolbar The personal toolbar is a customizable toolbar that is preconfigured to include the following elements 10 1 The Initial Browser Window Home This points to a web address configured to be displayed as Mozilla s start page Bookmarks This button lets you access the bookmarks collected from intranet or Internet sites The Mozilla Organization This points to the home page of the Mozilla project 10 1 4 Sidebar The sidebar is located to the left in a separate subwindow What s Related Under this tab Mozilla can list a number of sites whose topic is related to the current one Search This is an interface to several well known search engines Bookmarks This tab is an additional entry point to your bookmarks which are presented here in a tree structure History This tab provides a list of the recently visited web pages 10 2 Working with Tabs Mozilla can display several web pages at a time in one window by using tabbed browsing This is often more convenient than opening a new browser window for each new document To display a document open a link under a new tab right click the correspond
267. r notes created with KNotes to the handheld s memo application Start the KDE application from the main menu or with the command knotes Calendar KOrganizer This conduit is responsible for syncing the appoint ments events of the hendheld The desktop equivalent is KOrganizer For more information about this program refer to Scheduling with KOrganizer on pageP1 Tasks KOrganizer This conduit is responsible for syncing task to do items The desktop counterpart is again KOrganizer Time Synchronization Conduit Enabling this conduit adjusts the handheld s clock to that of the desktop computer during each sync operation This is only a good idea if the clock of the desktop computer itself is corrected by a time server at fairly frequent intervals Available Conduits Available conduits are on Active Conduits KDE Addressbook Conduit Wo Gr PERE sepsis Ko izer Calendar Conduit are on the right Only rganzer carendar Conqu active conduits can be KOrganizer Todo Conduit configured KPilot Expenses Conduit KPilot KNotes Conduit Time Synchronization Conduit Figure 5 1 Configuration Dialog with the Available Conduits 5 2 1 Configuring the Handheld Connection To be able to use KPilot first set up the connection with the handheld computer The configuration depends on the type of cradle docking unit used with the handheld There are two types of these USB cradles and serial cradles SUSE LINUX JOJIdM U
268. r part of the dialog For example to use the regional settings for the US but use Spanish as the system language click Add Language to select this lan guage and add it to the list of available system languages To remove a lan guage mark it in the list and click Remove Language Numbers To use different number settings than the default settings associated with the country selected under Locale configure the decimal symbol thousands separator positive sign and negative sign in this dialog The decimal symbol and the thousands separator for currencies are configured separately under the Money tab The default setting on a US system is for the decimal symbol an optional for the thousands separator no en try for the positive sign and for the representation of negative numbers Money Configure all currency related settings that should differ from the de fault settings for the selected system language in this dialog For example 1 2 Settings on a US system the currency symbol is the decimal symbol is thou sands are separated with a and the number of fraction digits is 2 The position of the currency symbol and the prefix for positive and negative amounts is arranged in such a way that the currency symbol precedes the prefix and the amount Time amp Date This dialog allows you to set your calendar system the time date and short date format and the first day of the week
269. rding these messages 12 10 2 Examples of Filters Assume for instance you are subscribed to the KDE user list kde user kde org Whenever a message from the mailing list arrives you want the message moved into another folder The following steps are necessary for creating this fil ter 1 7 Add a new folder as described in Message Folders on page Provide a suitable name for it such as kde user First think about the best way to clearly identify the messages to filter The messages from the KDE user list described in our example can be identified by the mailto kde user kde org address found in the To or CC field Click Settings gt Configure Filters The left side of the window that opens displays the existing filters The right side is composed of two panels filter rules and filter actions Click the New icon bottom left to create an empty filter It appears as unknown In the Filter Criteria panel select To or CC from the first drop down menu and contains from the second drop down menu Enter kde user kde org in the text field In the Filter actions panel select Move to Folder from the first drop down menu second drop down menu with the list of folders appears Choose the folder to which the filtered messages should be moved if they meet the desired criteria In this case choose kde user from the drop down men
270. re 1 9 KSnapshot To take a screenshot use Snapshot delay to determine the period in seconds to wait between when New Snapshot is clicked and the actual creation of the screenshot If Only grab the window containing the pointer is active only the window currently under the pointer is photographed By default the pro gram creates a shot of the entire screen To change this you can select an item from Screenshot Mode To save the screenshot to a file select Save as and set the directory and file name in the dialog that opens To print the screenshot right away select Print 1 4 11 The Information Manager Kontact The application Kontact bundles the display of e mails notes contacts news weather and a calendar into one window Open it by pressing and enter ing kontact See Figure on the facing page Select Settings to configure Kontact and its individual components To decide which components should be used select Choose Components Make set tings for individual components by selecting the Configure Kontact menu Settings for these components are the same as those for the individual programs 1 4 Important Utilities m 3 oz d Iz p Ww Wednesday 03 March 2004 a outor i D Mail A Contacts J rri No birthdays or anniversaries pending within the next 62 days U Todo List O Calendar 15 00 17 00 Meeting O Wows O lotes
271. re OpenOffice org Quick starter Once enabled the Quickstarter is started automatically each time you log in to your desktop To stop this from happening in the future select Quit in the Quickstarter menu 3 1 The OpenOffice org Quickstarter Open Ctrl O Open Recent OpenOffice org Calc OpenOffice org Draw OpenOffice org Impress OpenOffice org Global OpenOffice org Math OpenOffice org Web OpenOffice org Writer Y Start with R Configure OpenOffice org Quickstarter ZJ Start OpenOffice org printer administration Da SS Help O Quit Cra E Ey E b ackage Datak 21 02 2003 Figure 3 1 The OpenOffice org Quickstarter S InS somo 610 eoyjouedo SU 3 2 Getting Help Get help for OpenOffice org at any time from the Help menu Depending on your selection the depth and type of help provided varies To get thoroughly ac quainted with a topic select Help gt Contents The help system provides in formation about each of the modules of OpenOffice org Writer Calc Impress etc If you find this information too broad or overwhelming try the Help Agent in stead which offers help and tips as you perform different actions with OpenOf fice org Select Help gt Help Agent to enable this If you feel you need just a few hints try Tips or Extended Tips They enable the program s tooltips sho
272. reate Create a new archive t for table Display the contents of an archive x for extract Unpack the archive v for verbose Show all files on screen while creating the archive f for file Choose a file name for the archive file When creating an archive this option must always be given as the last one To pack the test directory with all its files and subdirectories into an archive named testarchive tar use the options c and f For the testing purposes of this example also add v to follow the progress of the archiving although this option is not mandatory After using cd to change to your home directory where the test directory is located enter tar cvf testarchive tar test After that view the contents of the archive file with tar tf testarchive tar The test directory with all its files and directories has remained unchanged on your hard disk To unpack the archive enter tar xvf testarchive tar but do not try this yet For file compression the obvious choice on Linux is the popular gzip pro gram Just enter gzip testarchive tar With 1s now see that the file testarchive taris no longer there and that the file testarchive tar gz has been created instead This file is much smaller and therefore much better suited for transfer via e mail or storage on a floppy Now unpack this file in the test 2 directory created earlier To do so en ter cp testarchive tar gz test2 to copy the file to that directory SUSE LINU
273. regularly The windows should be able to be opened and have sunshades to avoid glare effects Sunlight can increase the room temperature considerably Sun shades attached to the outside of the building provide the best protection Plants can improve room conditions and are therefore recommended in all cases They increase the relative humidity and filter pollutants from the air 22 1 5 Noise Levels Noise is a physically powerful stress factor Although it is often played down too much noise makes you ill Apart from health impairments such as defective hearing vegetative disorders and psychic changes noise affects our efficiency by impairing our ability to concentrate Furthermore discontent can reduce working motivation The fact that proper noise abatement can possibly cost a lot of money is also problematic A calm working environment improves efficiency Work at terminal workstations is often characterized as mental activity Therefore the maximum load value for scientific work or programming is 55 dB A The dB A represent a weighted evaluation of the acoustic pressure The A filter curve most resembles human perception An increase of the sound level by 10 dB A is normally perceived as a duplication of volume Because mainly mental work is done at terminal workstations quiet work ing materials should be used from the start The maximum limiting value for office work is 55 dB A With especially high mental de
274. remar hacker project in history an entire clone of Unix for 386 486 Pentium micros distributed for free with sources over the net Alpha and Sparc and many other machines are also in use Linux is what GNU aimed to be and it relies on the GNU toolset the Free Software Foundation didn t produce the kernel to go w a D Lookup done Figure 2 2 GNOME Dictionary databases for special vocabularies such as jargon or computer terminology Un der Default strategy specify what to look for the exact word parts of the word or the prefix or suffix Under Help access the online manual of the application with Contents and information about the author and version of the application with About 2 4 2 Managing Archives with File Roller In GNOME manage file archives with File Roller This application is able to han dle archives of the following types tar tar gz tgz tar bz tar bz2 tar Z zip lha rar lzh ear jar and war Easily view archive contents from File Roller with other applications without needing to decompress the archives File Roller supports drag and drop allowing you to drag file icons from the desktop or from the file manager Nautilus to the File Roller dialog and drop them there To create a new archive select Archive gt New In the next dialog specify the directory in which to create the new archive in the left window Enter the file name o
275. rences Appearance Under this entry set the fonts and colors the browser should use select a theme and switch between the German and the English language version Navigator The first thing that can be changed under this entry is the start page for the browser Configure Mozilla to start with a blank page the home page as defined below which may be your organization s intranet por tal for instance or the last page visited In the History dialog define the number of days for which the addresses of visited pages should be stored Languages lets you define a list of preferred languages which is useful for pages that are available in several languages Under Internet Search tell Mozilla which search engine to use 120 10 3 Preferences If you do not want Mozilla to show matching Internet addresses from the history automatically as soon as you start typing disable this feature un der Smart Browsing gt Automatically complete text typed into Location bar Alternatively configure Mozilla to autocomplete addresses in the en try field itself To do so select the Advanced button then in the dialog Autocomplete best match as you type One of the options available in the Tabbed Browsing dialog is to have Mozilla open a new tab for a web page whenever you middle click a link Under Downloads specify how the progress of file downloads should be monitored Enabling Open the
276. river used 164 141 Configuration User tux Phone Numbers Delay 10 Duration o E Action MailAndSave Pin Cancel Figure 14 2 Fax Functionality User Preferences Action The default setting MailAndSave causes a received fax message to be saved in the system and forwarded to the user by e mail The SaveOnly option merely causes the fax to be saved to the hard disk This option is rec ommended for expert users only Click OK to accept the changes Click Cancel to drop the changes and close the form 14 1 2 Configuring the Answering Machine The provided standard scripts also offer a comfortable multiuser answering ma chine This can be be configured with the YaST Answering Machine module in the Network Devices group Similar to the fax configuration there is a list with the already configured users which is empty when the module is started for the first time The recorded in coming call is sent to the user associated with the phone number This shows the SUSE LINUX uoiooiunuJulooeje NASI 165 166 M Note YaS Wiastatier An answering machine for t one or more users can be set up in this dialog Each user must have at least one unique phone number configured Refer to the telecommunication chapter in the manuals for further details When adding or editing a user a dialog will be shown with the following details U
277. rmation sources SUSE LINUX 6d2 ui uoudAIou3 131 KMail The KDE Mail Application KMail is the KDE mail application In addition to sending and receiving e mail and using multiple mail protocols it offers the possibility to configure several custom filters for sorting e mail messages in individual folders Encryption de cryption and signing of e mail messages can also be handled conveniently in KMail 121 KMailandKontactl o 134 122 MailFormatsi 134 Pr 134 124 Configuring KMail 135 125 UsingKMaill o ooo oo 137 Ss at evoke Toros ok 138 Jt bees oe Rae BRA a eae bo 139 128 lImportingMail eee 141 12 9 The Address BOOK lll 141 12 10 Filters 2 s e as da iaa 141 oe 145 12 12 For More Information 0 147 UOHOSIICAY IION 30 SUL IONN 134 12 1 KMail and Kontact KMail can be displayed along with other applications in one window using the Kontact utility Refer to Thie Information Manager Kontact on page 34 for details about this 12 2 Mail Formats KMail can save messages in the following formats mbox This traditional UNIX format the oldest saves all messages in a single file Directories are also simulated by means of individual files The individ ual mails can only be distinguished by the From line MailDir In contrast to the mbox format the MailDir format has a
278. rnet to access a menu for configuring KInternet To configure your access select Settings Configure with YaST After entering the root password YaST starts Depending on the access type start the modem ISDN network or DSL configuration of YaST to select a provider from a list KInternet can do even more if the option Channel Bundling is activated in YaST a second ISDN channel can be added to an existing connection with Add link This doubles the transfer rate although at a higher price Activate channel bundling if you need to download large files The activated channel bundling is evident from the red plus symbol at the top left corner of the KInternet icon Users who want to establish Internet connections automatically can use dial on demand DoD If this mode is selected KInternet automatically connects to your Internet service provider ISP as soon as a request is submitted After a certain time out the connection is terminated A DoD connection is evident from the blue D at the bottom right corner of the KInternet icon p Caution Beware of Soaring Costs Note that DoD only makes sense if you have a flat rate Internet ac count If that is not the case connecting and disconnecting all the time can become very costly Caution SUSE LINUX 25 26 1 4 3 The Download Manager KGet KGet is the download manager for KDE It manages your transfers in a window Stop resume delete
279. rop downs To use the print pre view function you must have KGhostView installed Alternatively specify a dif ferent PostScript viewer such as QV after selecting File gt Print Print gt System Options then going to the Preview item in the dialog 6 5 Address Book To store important contacts or to search for a contact open the address book by selecting File Addressbook In the address book window make a new en try by selecting File New Contact The KDE address book application 6 4 Printing although linked with KOrganizer is an independent program Learn more about itin Address Management with KAddressBook on page 99 6 6 Help For any problems or questions regarding KOrganizer consult the detailed in structions for the program Access them with Help gt KOrganizer Handbook SUSE LINUX Jeziuo81Oy UM Guinpeuos 97 Address Management with KAddressBook KAddressBook provides quick and comfortable access to all address data of your contacts As well as managing your local address data KAddressBook can ac cess if available a central LDAP server that hosts contact data for your entire de partment or your entire company KAdaressBook supports the import and export of data in several formats including vCard CSV and MS Exchange ensuring smooth interaction with other programs 71 Starting the Program o oo 100
280. rop to fit the current selection selections are explained in Selecting Parts of Images on the facing page Auto Shrink makes the crop smaller based on color changes in the image Press Cancel to abort the crop Press Crop to crop the image The results of Resize are identical to those of Change Canvas Size described in Changing the Canvas Size on the next page Scaling an Image Select Image gt Scale Image to change the overall size of an image Select the new size by entering it in New Width or New Height or by adjusting the Ra tio To change the proportions of the image when scaling this distorts the im age click the chain icon to the right of the ratio fields to break the link between them When those fields are linked all values are changed proportionately when 20 5 Editing Images Basics the value in one of the four fields is changed When the link is broken width and height can be adjusted independently of each other or the X and Y ratios can be adjusted individually The values in the Print Size are independent of the pixel size In that section modify the image resolution by modifying the resulting image size when printed or modifying the resolution itself Use the unit drop down boxes to change the measuring unit Interpolation is an expert option that controls the scale method When finished adjusting the size press OK to scale the image Re
281. rt information about the element such as a button over which the mouse is hovering Extended Tips gives a longer version of the tooltips Note If you are not sure whether the features are active open the Help menu A checked menu item indicates that the corresponding help function is currently active Note SUSE LINUX ______ 59 60 3 3 Managing the Transition from Microsoft Office OpenOffice org is able to work with Microsoft Office documents To convert such documents select File AutoPilot Document Converter Choose the file format from which to convert There are several StarOffice and Microsoft Office formats available After selecting a format click Next then specify where OpenOffice org should look for documents to convert and in which directory the converted files should be placed Before continuing make sure all other set tings are appropriate Note Documents from a Windows partition are usually in a subdirectory of windows Note zii Click Next to see a summary of the actions to perform which gives another op portunity to check whether all settings are correct Finally start the conversion by clicking Convert Given that the workings of Microsoft formats are not disclosed by the company other office programs may have difficulties importing such files in the correct way If you intend to use your documents on other platforms you sho
282. s Get more information with Help 13 1 Starting Evolution 13 3 Evolution Overview The default window view is shown in Figure 13 1 The available menus menu items and the icons in the toolbar vary from window to window Use the Short cuts panel to the left to select the information to display in the right panel Ad just the size of any panels by dragging the dividing bars Use View to remove the Shortcuts Bar or add a Folder Bar at any time The different items listed in Shortcuts are described in the following File View Actions Tools Help Q New v Qr sena Receive Print Reload p Shortcuts Q9 pl Wednesday May 7 2003 Summary ym dy 1 Mail summary Boston Dutbox 0 0 Overcast Moderate mist 13 0 C Inbox 0 1 ER Calendar 354 Appointments Ce a Today ka o Sensors Online ls Linux Bringing Open AE Ji Systems to the Factory Floor o NewsFactor Where Are All the Cool Embedded Linux Gadgets o Open Source Digest Network Programming with 10 Socket o Debian Weekly News May 6 2003 Tasks o Release Digest KDE May 6 2003 Serm Nn tasks Figure 13 1 The Evolution Window with Shortcuts and Summary 13 3 1 Summary The Summary provides some basic information about e mail appointments and tasks along with personally configurable weather and news sources This window is shown in Figure 13 1 Use Tools
283. s The pencil brush airbrush and eraser work much like their real life equiva lents The ink tool works like a calligraphy pen Paint by clicking and dragging The bucket fill is a method of coloring areas of an image It fills based on color boundaries in the image Adjusting the threshold modifies its sensitivity to color changes Adding Text With the text tool easily add text to an image With the tool options select the desired font font size color justification indent and line spacing Then click a starting point in the image A small dialog opens in which to enter your text En ter single or multiple lines of text then press Close The text tool creates text on a special layer To work with the image after adding text read Layers on the next page When the text layer is active it is possible to modify the text by clicking in the image to reopen the entry dialog Change the settings by modifying the tool options Retouching Images The Clone Tool The clone tool is ideal for retouching images It enables you to paint in an image using information from another part of the image If desired it can instead take information from a pattern When retouching it is usually a good idea to use a small brush with soft edges In this way the modifications can blend better with the original image To select the source point in the image press and hold while clicking the de sired source point Then paint with the tool as
284. s also not possible to increase the size of a pixel image without losing quality Unlike pixel graphics vector graphics do not store information for all individual pixels Instead they store information about how image points lines or areas are grouped together Vector images can also be scaled very easily The drawing application of OpenOffice org for example uses this format 20 2 Starting The GIMP Start GIMP from the main menu Alternatively enter gimp amp in a command line 20 2 1 Initial Configuration When starting GIMP for the first time or the 2 0 version for the first time a con figuration wizard opens for preparatory configuration The default settings are acceptable for most purposes Press Continue in each dialog unless you are fa miliar with the settings and prefer another setup 20 1 Graphics Formats 20 2 2 The Default Windows Three windows appear by default They can be arranged on the screen and ex cept the toolbox closed if no longer needed Closing the toolbox closes the appli cation In the default configuration The GIMP saves your window layout when you exit Dialogs left open reappear when you next start the program GIMP Tip of the Day This small window opens with useful tips and tricks each time the program starts Reading the tips is recommended for new users Uncheck Show tip next time GIMP starts to disable it This setting can also be changed in the prefer ences Press Close to
285. s are located in usr bin and usr X11R6 bin How can I recognize executable files The command 1s 1 returns all executable files in the directory usr bin in green Also recognize them by the x in the first column rWXI Xr Xx 1 root root 64412 Jul 23 15 23 usr bin ftp Iwant to remove Linux How does this work With fdisk delete the Linux partitions You might need to run fdisk in Linux Afterwards boot from the MS DOS disk and run fdisk MBRin DOS or Windows How can I access my CD First mount the CD with the mount command Information about this com mand can be found in mount on pagep75 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 I cannot get my CD out of the drive What should I do now First unmount the CD with the umount command More information about this can be found in umount on pageD75 In KDE just right click the CD ROM icon and select Unmount Drive If YaST is running on your com puter exit it How can I find out how much space is available in Linux With the df hT command See dfjon page Can I copy and paste in Linux OVA XANI ISNS Yes this is possible Highlight the text block by clicking and dragging with the left mouse button then insert by clicking with the middle mouse button The right mouse button has a special function in most programs and appli cations Do I need to be afraid of a virus in Linux In Linux there have been no serious viruses found Also viruses
286. s as desired Prog Sound Blaster 16 CTL1745 Input Gain PC MIC Line PCM Output Master Speaker Gain a E i R it 4 4 3 R Fl 4 Eje El E El 4 Lock Lock JT Lock Lock f Lock F Lock Figure 15 1 The Mixer gamix 15 2 2 qamix QAMix is a mixer with a QT interface If necessary the application interface can be configured in a flexible way in an XML file All parameters can be controlled via MIDI On start up the application first searches the directory qamix for an XML file corresponding to the name of the ALSA driver of your sound card If such a file does not exist it searches the same directory for the file default xml If this file does not exist either the program continues its search in the direc tory usr share qamix SUSE LINUX 177 178 If you have several sound cards select the desired card with the parameters The parameter hw 0 stands for the first sound card hw 1 for the second and so on The parameter g can be used to specify a file for the XML description of the application interface explicitly Detailed information about the XML format is available in the directory usr share doc packages qamix Eile About Playback r Master Stereo r Surround Tone 3D Control Ext Source Playback Capture IEC958 Playback IEC958 Capture Pos es 90 EE 77 77 100 100 39 Vetted LEE EE IG GN FELEEL GL G IN LELEEGL GG
287. s does not reveal much of a change compared to an 1s on a file without an ACL Roadmap is owned by tux who belongs to the group project3 tux holds both write and read access to this file and his group as well as all other users have read access The only difference that distinguishes this file from a file without an ACL is the additional in the first column holding the per mission bits Get details about the ACL by executing getfacl Roadmap file Roadmap owner tux group project3 user rw user jane rw effective r group r group djungle rw effective r mask r other The first three lines of the output do not hold any information not available with ls 1 These lines only state file name owner and owning group Lines 4 to 9 hold the ACL entries Conventional access permissions represent a subset of those possible when using ACLs Our example ACL grants read and write ac cess to the owner of the file as well as to a user jane lines 4 and 5 The conven tional concept has been expanded allowing access to an extra user The same ap plies to the handling of group access The owning group holds read permissions line 6 and the group d jungle holds read and write permissions The mask en try in line 8 reduces the effective permissions for the user jane and the group djungle to read access Other users and groups do not get any kind of access to the file line 9 Only very basic information has been provid
288. s se lected the files and subdirectories in it are listed in the right hand part of the dialog To speed things up narrow down the list according to the file type by specifying the file extension such as t xt under Filter To mark the current directory for quick access at a later time click the star button in the toolbar and create a bookmark for it Any directory book marked in this way can subsequently be reached via the menu to avoid going through the entire file system again Use the configuration menu ac cessible with the wrench button to customize the way in which the items in the dialog are sorted and viewed Recently Opened Files This opens a menu from which you can open the re cently opened files Save Ct This saves the document in its current form If you have been editing a new document the program displays a dialog with which to spec ify the name of the file and its location directory Save As This opens a dialog in which to specify the name and the directory under which to save the document The dialog is essentially the same as the one displayed after selecting File Open Reload F5 This reloads the currently opened file reverting it to its state as saved on disk Print Ctr lt P This opens a simple dialog in which to define printing op tions for the document and start the print job Close CHW This closes the currently loaded document If th
289. s take effect immediately Restore the current keyboard shortcut by clicking its entry and leaving the dialog with Close 2 2 11 Sound system alerts This module allows the association of certain system events and application alerts with characteristic audio signals The dialog box consists of two tabs Gen eral and Sound Events The two check boxes in the General tab must be acti vated to use audio signals for certain desktop events In the second tab determine which events and application alerts should be asso ciated with which sounds All sound associations already defined for applications are listed Test a sound by first selecting the corresponding notice in the Event column then clicking Play Change the sound by clicking Event then Browse The dialog that appears provides a list of files from which to choose Close it with OK 2 3 File Management with Nautilus Nautilus is the file manager and viewer of GNOME The following section pro vides an overview of the basic functions of Nautilus as well as a few tips on its configuration More information can be found in the help pages for Nautilus 2 3 1 Navigating in Nautilus Figure 2 1 on the following page shows the standard window of Nautilus To open folders or files double click the icons Folders will be displayed in a new window in addition to the parent folder Alternatively set Nautilus to behave like a browser with the s
290. sage To compose new messages select Message gt New Message CtD4N To compose a message fill in the respective fields in the message composer window shown in Figure Message Edit View Options Attach Tools Settings Help Ote wy SS 2 smine plugin To Tuxine lt tuxine example com gt m cc see Subject Test mail Hi how are you today Bye Tux Column 4 Line 6 Figure 12 2 Composing a Message To send messages from different e mail accounts select one of the identities con figured as described in Defining Your User Identity on page The buttons 138 126 Creating a New Message next to To and CC and possibly BCC open the address book allowing you to select an address After entering the first few characters of an address press Ctrl D to see a list of possible completions To attach files to your message click the paper clip icon and select the file to at tach Alternatively drag a file from the desktop or another folder to the New Message window or select one of the options in the Attach menu Normally the format of a file is recognized correctly If this is not the case right click the icon From the menu that appears select Properties This opens a dia log in which to set the format and the name of the file and add a description In addition decide whether the attached file should be signed or encrypted When
291. separate write process is applied for every individual track The RAW mode is not used very of ten as the writer does not perform any data corrections The best setting is automatic as it allows K3b to use the most suitable settings Simulate This function can be used to check if your system supports the se lected writing speed The writing is performed with the laser deactivated to test the system On the fly Burns the desired data without first creating an image file do not use this feature on low performance machines An image file also known as an ISO image is a file containing the entire CD content that is subsequently written to the CD exactly as it is Burnfree This option was formerly known as burn proof It helps to avoid buffer underruns of a CD writer If burnfree is selected the CD writer will mark the current position and can return here in the event of a buffer un derrun However this causes small data gaps that are audible in audio CDs It is preferable to select a suitable burning speed that avoids buffer under runs Create Image File only This option creates an image file Set the path for this file under Temporary File The image file can be written to CD at a later time To do this use Tools gt Write ISO Image If this option is used all other options in this section are deactivated The Settings tab features options needed for the creation of CDs with multiple d
292. ser The system user who wants to receive calls with the answering machine Phone Numbers One or more phone numbers separated by commas that belong only to this user You can also enter which means the user will get any call Delay Delay in seconds before the answering rx machine responds to the call ri ED Answering Machine Configuration User Table User Phone Numbers Delay Duration Action Ada j j Abort Figure 14 3 YaST Module for Configuring the Answering Machine importance of assigning unique phone numbers to the users The individual user welcome message cannot be set at this point The recording can be made later with the remote access function of the configured answering machine The an swering machine has an automatic silence recognition routine that terminates the recording session after five seconds without noises Incoming fax calls are also automatically recognized and received in most cases This automatic routine can however fail with older fax machines which is why a separate fax number is to preferred wher ever possible 14 1 Configuration Note m Use Add Edit and Delete to administer the entries The entry form for creat ing a new entry or for modifying an existing one contains the following fields User gernot Phonenumbers hr 24 Delay 115 E Duration Action Pin oss Figure 14 4 A
293. sers other than himself write per missions he can do this by entering the command chmod go w ProjectData To prohibit all users from adding a new file to the folder ProjectData enter chmod w ProjectData Now not even the owner can write to the file without first reestablishing write permissions Changing Ownership Permissions Other important commands to control the ownership and permissions of the file system components are chown change owner and chgrp change group The command chown can be SUSE LINUX IOUS eut ut 8uppoM 267 268 used to transfer ownership of a file to another user However only root is permitted to perform this change Suppose the file Roadmap from Example on page 266 should no longer belong to tux but to the user geeko root should then enter chown geeko Roadmap chgrp changes the group ownership of the file However the owner of the file must be a member of the new group In this way the user tux from OutputP1 1 on page 265 can switch the group owning the file ProjectData to project4 with the command chgrp project4 ProjectData as long as he is a member of this new group 21 2 3 The setuid Bit In certain situations the access permissions may be too restrictive Therefore Linux has additional settings that enable the temporary change of the current user and group identity for a specific action For example the cdrecord pro gram normally requires root permissions to access the writer for burni
294. set restores the original val ues Cancel aborts the procedure Changing the Canvas Size Changing the canvas size is like putting a mat around an image Even if the mat is smaller the rest of the image is there but you can only see part of it If the mat is larger you see the original image with extra space around it To do this select Image gt Canvas Size In the dialog that opens enter the new size By default the width and height maintain the same proportions as the current image To change this click the chain icon to the right of Ratio Enter the desired size in the height and width fields or adjust the ratios After adjusting the size determine how the existing image should be positioned in comparison to the new size Use the offset values or drag the box inside the frame at the bottom When satisfied with the changes click OK to change the canvas size Click Reset to restore the original values or Cancel to cancel the canvas resize Note dINID eui ui sordos Buyoindiuny The same results can be achieved using the Resize option of the crop tool Note 20 5 2 Selecting Parts of Images It is often useful to perform an image operation on only part of an image To do this the part of the image with which to work must be selected Areas can be selected using the select tools available in the toolbox using the quick mask or combining different options Selec
295. ssing Space The capture controller reg ulates the input amplifier Whether the Line controller or the MIC controller is used depends on the recording source xnur ui PUNOS For more information enter man alsamixer alsamixergui is a mouse operated variant of alsamixer with a graphical interface Note The look and feel of alsamixer depends on the type of sound card used The description referred to the AC97 standard for mixer func tionality If your sound card does not comply with this standard some features may not be supported The mixer Envy24 should be used for sound cards equipped with the Envy24 ice1712 chip see The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 on this page Note 15 2 6 Mixer Parameters of Soundblaster Live and Audigy Apart from the parameters of the AC97 standard there are many additional op tions for Soundblaster Live and Audigy cards The controls AC97 Wave and Music are used for playback AC97 can be used to adjust the level of the AC97 mix This mix also receives input from the line mic and CD signals Wave adjusts the level of the PCM channels Music controls the volume of the internal wavetable synthesis of MIDI data Apart from the Capture parameter for recordings the AC97 Capture control is used to control the level of the AC97 recording sources Furthermore Wave and Music can be selected as recordi
296. st by clicking the column header of the value by which to sort To add an attendee for an item click New Then enter the name in Name and the e mail address in the field below Use Address Book to query the address book and select entries from it In Role define the function of an attendee ob server chair participant which can also be used to sort the list of attendees later With Status assign a status to an attendee such as needs action accepted or 6 3 Using the Calendar lo 3 3 a EN Attendees Recurrence Attachments Tile Meeting Location r Date amp Time Start 05 03 2004 sj les 7 End 05 02 2004 sj 250 7 CJ No time associated Duration 2 hours A C Beminder l 8 LD Showtime as Busy J Select Categories Access Public Load Template J Save as Template fm ox J Apply 9 Cancel Figure 6 3 Scheduling with KOrganizer completed Change the status of an attendee at any time by selecting the attendee in the list then choosing another status from the drop down list If you check Re quest response the attendees receive an e mail with the relevant schedule item 6 3 3 To Do Items Create a new to do item by selecting Actions gt New To Do In the dialog that opens specify the exact start and due date and time for the new task its progress in percent and its priority If other peo
297. sts examined the home workstations of computer users systematically they would find many problems Unfortunately no standard has yet prevented individual users from buying so called special computer ta bles The low priced metal tube frames with practical rollers little stability ergonomically retractable keyboard tray no wrist pad integrated PC case holder and printer stand with paper shelf little stacking space and sometimes little legroom swiveling mouse pad unstable and insufficient working space and good view of the screen too close too high allow you to use a computer for a short time only They should not be used at professional terminal worksta tions as they hardly meet any criteria of the corresponding standards You will not find much of this kind of computer furniture in professional computer equip ment catalogs because manufacturers indirectly keep an eye on the employees health by observing the minimum standards of computer workstations Even these minimum standards should be improved 22 1 1 The Right Desk A table at the wrong height strains arm and back muscles The resulting cramped posture especially strains the spine Too little leg room can force an unnatural body posture and cause disorders to the blood supply Choosing the right table is very easy It should be as wide and deep as possible An individual adjustment of the table height would be optimal Working tables at which
298. system and iso9660 for CDs For hard disks not defined in the file etc fstab the device type must also be specified In this case only root can mount it If the file system should also be mounted by other users enter the option user in the ap propriate line in the etc fstab file separated by commas and save this change Further information is available in mount 1 umount option s mountpoint This command unmounts a mounted drive from the file system To prevent data loss run this command before taking a removable data medium from its drive Normally only root is al lowed to run the commands mount and umount To enable other users to run these commands edit the etc fstab file to specify the option user for the respective drive SUSE LINUX IOUS eut ULM BUMJOM 275 276 21 3 2 System Commands System Information df option s directory The df disk free command when used without any options displays information about the total disk space the disk space currently in use and the free space on all the mounted drives If a directory is specified the information is limited to the drive on which that directory is located H Shows the number of occupied blocks in gigabytes megabytes or kilo bytes in human readable format t Type offile system ext2 nfs etc du option s path This command when executed without any param eters shows the total disk space occupied by files and subdirectories in t
299. t 6 Willkommen bei SuSE 7 lt title gt 8 5 m meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt 10 kmeta name robots content noarchive gt 11 lt META NAME description CONTENT SuSE Linux AG The Linux Experts Ihr globaler L sungsanbieter rund um Linux gt 12 lt META NAME keywords CONTENT SuSE SuSE Linux Linux Linux Service Linux Consulting Linux Software Distributor Linux Distributor 13 eta 14 tyles 15 lt link rel stylesheet href styles home css type text css title SuSE Homepage Styles gt 16 tyle 17 avaScript 18 lt script language JavaScript type text javascript aia src jscript change img js script script language JavaScript Line 10 Col 0 INS NORM Figure 4 1 The KWrite Text Editor 4 1 Starting KWrite 4 2 The File Menu New Ct N This creates a new file and at the same time opens a new KWrite window in which to start typing your text Open Cti O Use this to open an existing file It opens a file selection di alog that resembles a file manager The left hand area provides a number of quick navigation buttons to list the files in your home directory or on the floppy with just one click without having to navigate through the entire di rectory hierarchy Alternatively use the entry field in the toolbar at the top or browse directories with the arrow buttons As soon as a directory i
300. t Initially it should be sufficient to enable the KAddressBook conduit without changing any of the defaults After the data has been synchronized for the first time configure the details what to do in case of conflicts the way in which backup databases are saved and how certain fields as stored on the handheld should be assigned to the fields expected by KAddressBook 5 2 Conduits Used by KPilot 5 2 3 Managing To Do Items and Events On the KDE desktop to dos tasks and events appointments are managed with KOrganizer Start the application from the main menu or with the command korganizer After enabling the calendar and the to do conduit of KPilot set some configuration options before using them ToDo File Conflict Resolution About Calendar file Browse Sync Action East sync if possible Always do a full sync may take some time Sync only Pilot items to PC next sync only O Sync only PC items to Pilot next sync only IR Sync archived entries to the PC l 3 Cancel J Figure 5 2 KPilot Configuration KOrganizer stores its files in the directory kde share apps korganizer However given that the directory kde begins with a dot it may not be shown by the file selection dialog In this case enter the complete path manually or ex plicitly toggle the display of hidden files dot files in the file selection dialog The default shortcut for this is F8
301. t margin less option s file s This command can be used to browse the con tents of the specified file Scroll half a screen page up or down with PgUp and or a full screen page down with Spoce Jump to the beginning or end of a file using and End Press 9 to exit the program 21 3 Important Linux Commands grep option s searchstring filenames The grep command finds a specific search string in the specified file s If the search string is found the command displays the line in which the searchstring was found along with the file name i Ignores case H Only displays the names of the respective files but not the text lines n Additionally displays the numbers of the lines in which it found a hit 1 Only lists the files in which searchst ring does not occur diff option s filel file2 Thediff command compares the contents of any two files The output produced by the program lists all lines that do not match This is frequently used by programmers who need only send their program alterations and not the entire source code q Only reports whether the two files differ File Systems mount option s device mountpoint This command can be used to mount any data media such as hard disks CD ROM drives and other drives to a directory of the Linux file system r mount read only t filesystem Specifies the file system The most common are ext2 for Linux hard disks msdos for MS DOS media v at for the Windows file
302. te a new identity profile select Settings gt Configure KMail then Identities gt New which opens a dialog Give the new identity a name such as private or office Click OK to proceed to a dialog in which to enter some additional information Under the General tab enter your name organization and e mail address Un der Encryption select your keys to send digitally signed or encrypted messages For the encryption features to work first create a key with KGpg described in Encryption with KGpgjon page I23 Under Advanced you can enter a reply to and a blind carbon copy address choose a dictionary select the folders for drafts and sent messages and define SUSE LINUX UOHDIAAY ION 30 SUL IIDIADI 135 136 how messages should be sent Under Signature decide if and how each of your messages should be signed with an extra piece of text at the end To activate this select Enable Signature and decide whether the signature should be taken from a file from an input field or from the output of a command When you are fin ished with all your identity settings confirm with Ok 12 4 2 Setting up Network Connections The settings under Network opened with Settings gt Configure KMail decide how KMail receives and sends e mail There are two tabs one each for sending and for receiving mail Many of these settings vary depending on the
303. th Run Program enter and run a command for example for starting a pro gram instead of navigating through the various program menus From the main menu you can also start the GNOME Control Center for configuring the desk top or YaST for installing additional software 2 1 5 Handling Floppy Disks CDs or DVDs To access floppy disks CDs or DVDs insert the medium in the appropriate drive Right click an empty spot of the desktop and select the desired medium from the Drives list A floppy disk or CD icon appears Double clicking the icon launches Nautilus which displays the contents of the medium Copy files to your personal home directory by dragging and dropping Copy files to a floppy disk in the same way SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 43 44 M Caution Do not simply remove floppy disks from the drive after using them Floppy disks CDs and DVDs must always be unmounted from the system first Close all Nautilus sessions still accessing the medium then right click the icon for the medium and select eject from the menu Then safely remove the floppy disk or CD the tray opens automati cally The icon disappears from the desktop Caution Floppy disks can also be formatted from the floppy disk menu In the dialog choose the format and density of the floppy disk In file system type choose be tween Linux native ext2 the file system for Linux and DOS FAT because Windows c
304. the time consuming full backup will be performed again during the next sync operation After a full backup all copies of the handheld s programs and databases are found in kde share apps kpilot DBBackup Ndbreplaceable username where username is the name of the user as registered on the handheld The two built in KPilot viewers can be used for a quick lookup of addresses or memos but they are not designed to actually manage this data The KDE applica tions mentioned above are much more suited for these tasks 5 3 Working with KPilot Eile Settings Help u 0 t HotSync Y j ce HotSync ds Memo Viewer Address Viewer H File Installer Y Figure 5 4 The Main Window of KPilot 5 3 2 Installing Programs on the Handheld The File Installer module is an interesting and useful tool for the installation of handheld programs These programs normally have the extension prc and they are ready to start immediately after uploading them to the handheld Be fore using such add on programs read their licenses as well as the instructions included SUSE LINUX JOlldx ULM anduon pjeupupH o Burziuoiu2uAS 89 Scheduling with KOrganizer KOrganizer is a KDE application for scheduling and managing events and tasks Because of the variety of ways in which the program can present your schedule itis a very helpful tool for keeping track of deadlines outstanding tasks and ap pointments It
305. ther scheduler is only possible with root privileges The application setpriority in the rtstools package is required for this task For example proceed as follows to run the application timidity with the FIFO scheduler 1 Start timidity Open a root console session Usepidof timidity to find the process ID of timidity A WO N Change the scheduler with the command setpriority lt processID gt fifo 10 You can use the following command in a root shell to speed up this procedure 186 154 Buffering and Latencies for i in pidof timidity do setpriority i fifo 10 done Running a program in root mode is always risky as the program is permitted to do anything If the computer is connected to the Internet the security risk would be unacceptable Security bugs in the program could be exploited for the purpose of gaining access to the system Caution xnu ui PUNOS The commands described in the following paragraphs should never be executed on machines that can be accessed from the Internet or if a system crash or data loss would have serious consequences Caution zi The sudo mechanism should be used for running a program in root mode This mechanism is demonstrated by means of the timidity application To enable all users on your system to execute timidity with root privileges modify the file etc sudoers See sudo and sudoers for the procedure If you are not famil iar with vi select a different ed
306. there If the computer does not respond to any of the keys and network intervention is not possible wait at least ten seconds before pressing reset to make sure there is no hard disk activity How can I switch from a virtual text console to the graphical user inter face By default there are six virtual text consoles that can be accessed with AIF to F Press APCE to go to the graphical user interface Index A access permissions sss 26511269 CHMOG nce erat teres x 272 file systems es er tnei ienes address management see KAddressBoo aleta da E Ne datas 210 alsatixet asin sz emi acia en 178 amaroK atada ara 181 B Bash 4 eret rote nas o eats commands functions o iris te wild cards browsers 21 0 eee eee eee eee bugs reporting C calendars Evolution Capibuite secar inn ettet Cat dd at Aa CDs audio creating PUMIN tata aio COPYING mitos ni ra e odo data creating 2 6 cece cece eee eee 216 ISO images 0066 e cece 220 WorkMan 2 0 00 ce eee eee A Capithfo pr cise estere eee capisuitefax 6 cece eee CAE less Dig teach te ia aks dake dah EE ER 304 UV ans canals sehe AI IRIURE RU ACE sia irr PS cuero d pardas supdatedb 5er trennen configuration files ESA airis 275 301 CP SaaS i easing aces a peque deeds 271 GNOME insistas eret rd diners digita
307. thout any additional parame ters the program lists the contents of the current directory in short form 1 Detailed list a Displays hidden files cp option s sourcefile targetfile Copies sourcefile totargetfile i Waits for confirmation if necessary before an existing target file is overwritten r Copies recursively includes subdirectories mv option s sourcefile targetfile Copies sourcefile to target file then deletes the original sourcefile b Creates a backup copy of the sourcefile before moving i Waits for confirmation if necessary before an existing target file is overwritten SUSE LINUX IOUS eut ULM BupoM 271 272 rm option s file s Removes the specified files from the file system Directories are not removed by rm unless the option r is used r Deletes any existing subdirectories i Waits for confirmation before deleting each file ln option s sourcefile targetfile Creates an internal link from the sourcefiletothe targetfile Nor mally such a link points directly to the sourcefile on the same file system However if 1n is executed with the s option it creates a symbolic link that only points to the directory in which the sourcefile is located enabling linking across file systems s Creates a symbolic link cd options s directory Changes the current directory cd without any parameters changes to the user s home directory mkdir option s directoryname Creates a new
308. thout any one of the world s leading H ii s gt Figure 8 1 The Browser Window of Konqueror 108 8 1 Starting Konqueror and Opening Web Pages 8 2 Saving Web Pages and Graphics As in other browsers you can save web pages To do this select Location Save as and specify a name for your HTML file However images are not saved To archive an entire web page including the images select Extras Archive Web Page Konqueror suggests a file name that you can usually accept The file name ends with war the extension for web archives To view the saved web archive later simply click the respective file and the web page is displayed in Konqueror along with its images 8 3 Enhanced Web Browsing Internet Keywords Searching the web using Konqueror is very practical Konqueror defines a num ber of search engines for you all with a specific shortcut To search for a certain topic on the Internet enter the shortcut and the keyword separated by a colon The relevant page containing the search results is then displayed You can also define your own shortcuts Simply select Settings gt Configure Konqueror gt Web Shortcuts A dialog appears in which to define your own abbreviations 8 4 Bookmarks Instead of remembering and reentering addresses for sites visited often you can bookmark these URLs using the Bookmark menu Apart from web
309. thout needing to unlock the secret key repeatedly activate Remember this password for the remainder of this session When you receive signed e mail from other users a small padlock icon appears at the end of the message If you click this symbol Evolution starts an external pro gram gpg to check the signature If the signature is valid a green check mark appears next to the padlock symbol If the signature is invalid a broken padlock appears The encryption and decryption of e mail is just as easy After composing the e mail message go to Security gt PGP encrypt and send the e mail message When you receive encrypted messages a dialog opens to ask for the password of your secret key Enter the passphrase to decrypt the e mail message 13 4 5 Folders Itis often convenient to sort e mail messages into a variety of folders To view your folder tree select View gt Folder Bar If accessing mail over IMAP the IMAP folders are also shown in this folder bar For POP and most other formats your folders are stored locally sorted under Local Folders Your Contacts Cal endar and Tasks are also treated as folders in this view but should not be used for storing e mail Several folders are included by default Inbox is where new messages fetched from a server are initially placed Sent is used for saving copies of sent e mail messages Outbox is temporary storage for e mail th
310. ting database 211 O office programs KAddressBook sssn KOrganizer 066 cece eee OpenOffice org 66 cece cece eee application modules PAULOPIOL sara adi ec c cell attributes guru P importing spreadsheet tables configuring sss eye 63 S DEW ccsenseek tb wise amp graphics iio 168 amp help ias Ord nd Impress ds 174 Microsoft document formats 160 sNavigator ascii a dd presentations selecting text spreadsheet oooococccoccco EODVTISE AE O ERO P partitions iaai ma naana kenana t passwd i censent tus eben e tends passwords changing oooocccccccccnoccccccnnos paths cessere er dean dion iabsolute coins aa A A sce eee working with permissions access control lists changing cir naaa SUSE LINUX 307 description oooocooocccocccccoooo 265 directories oooooooooocrooco mm 266 lO arar rias 265 PING ico ice are 277 printing E GIMP aio 249 PLOCESSES ael ore AA tav Duae att 276 Killing eren 277 OVETV EW eensssrssked i nre c e rep a 2 programs install cocoa ias 300 PS a ia 277 Q o A A pea FEE acea 177 S scanning character recognition 233 Kooka eee 2271233 scheduling sss see KOrganizer screenshots 00 0000 see KSnapshot shells vats anna ceca ae eax wen amen 255 A ru hg ha d tate 256 commands
311. tings Depending on which printer is currently selected in the overview view and mod ify status and model information and configuration options in the following four tabs at the center of the dialog window Information This tab provides general and unmodifiable information about the printer such as the printer type its status location and designation Jobs This tab corresponds to KJobViewer described in Monitoring Print Jobs on page 26 Properties All settings related to the printer are available here general informa tion drivers interfaces separator pages quotas and user accesses Instances Depending on the document type you may have diverse require ments for the printouts page format duplex printing orientation print quality and banners Combine the characteristic settings for each type in printer profiles called instances To create a new profile select New and enter a name for the profile Click Settings to open a configuration dia log in which to specify these settings To save the settings and exit the di alog click OK To define one of your custom profiles as the default for this printer click Set as Default Your default profile is used when print ing from applications You can only switch between the individual profiles in the printer administration module 1 2 2 Desktop Under Appearance set the standard font font size background colors and un derlining on the desktop
312. tions can also be modified with the items under Select The selection is outlined with a dashed line called marching ants SUSE LINUX _______ 243 244 Using the Select Tools The main select tools are rather easy to use The paths tool which can also be used for more than selecting is more complicated so is not described here In the tool options for the other select tools determine whether the selection should re place be added to be subtracted from or intersect with an existing selection Rectangular Select This tool can be used to select rectangular or square areas In the tool options select among Free Select Fixed Size and Fixed Aspect Ratio to control the shape and size of the selection Elliptical Select Use this to select elliptical or circular areas The same options are available as with rectangular selection Lasso Draw a selection area freehand with this tool by dragging the mouse over the image with the left mouse button pressed The end points will be con nected with a straight line when you release the tool The area inside is then selected Magic Wand This tools selects a region based on color similarities By Color With this select all the pixels in the image with the same color as the clicked pixel Intelligent Scissors Click a series of points in the image As you click the points are connected based on color differences Using the Quick Mask The quick mask is a way of selecting par
313. to swap the right and left mouse buttons Use the slider to determine the maximum delay in seconds between two clicks that the system should interpret as a double click The appearance and size of the cursor can be changed under the Cursor tab Four different settings are available Changes are not activated until the next lo gin Under Locate Pointer activate an option that causes the cursor to be high lighted when you press Ctrl making it easier to find Under Movement set the Acceleration and Sensitivity of the screen cursor 2 2 3 Menus and Toolbars The settings in this module affect the menus and toolbars of all GNOME compatible applications Select for toolbar icons to be displayed as Text Only Icons Only Text Beside Icons or Text Below Icons The default setting is Text Only Activate Toolbars can be detached and moved around to allow the detachment of the toolbar from all other window elements and allow its free positioning on the desktop This makes a grabbing area appear on the left side of the toolbar Clicking and holding this area relocates the toolbar Every menu entry in any application menu can be displayed with the corre sponding icon Activating Show icons in menus tests the settings with the pro vided example menu 2 2 4 Screensaver The module for configuring the screensaver is subdivided into two tabs Dis play Modes and Advanced Select the screensa
314. top Create New Use this menu item to create new directories files or devices on the desktop A list of possible elements is provided for selection in a sub menu 1 1 Desktop Components Bookmarks The bookmark editor allows you to create group change or delete bookmarks The bookmarks are used by the browser and file man ager Konqueror The bookmark editor also allows you to import book marks from other browsers such as Mozilla Netscape Opera and Internet Explorer Run Command This menu item opens a window in which to enter a com mand manually The command is executed after pressing Enter Undo Use this item to undo the last action For example if you have just cre ated a new directory on the desktop clicking this item reverts the creation so the directory disappears Paste To keep a folder or document handy on the desktop you can copy an icon from the file manager by right clicking and selecting Copy then mov ing the mouse to the desired location on the desktop Right click again and select Paste The icon is now available on your desktop and can be moved around by dragging it with the left mouse button pressed Icons This allows you to rearrange the icons on the desktop You can also change the order of the icons Windows This arranges the windows on the desktop either on top of each other begining from the top left corner or next to each other Refresh Desktop
315. tores the messages and allows you to access them from it They are only downloaded to your client host as needed This offers a number of advantages One of them is that the same messages are available from several client hosts your machine at work and your laptop used on the road for example Another one is that mailboxes can be shared among different users For a more detailed explanation of the protocol see http en wikipedia org wiki IMAP dIMAP Disconnected IMAP dIMAP offers the same possibilities as IMAP with the additional advantage that messages can be edited offline This is a big advantage for those situations where a permanent connection to the server is not available as when using a laptop With dIMAP messages edited offline are synched with the server as soon as the connection is reestablished 12 4 Configuring KMail When KMail is started for the first time a Mail folder is added to your home di rectory This folder contains some basic mail directories inbox outbox drafts sent and trash Go to Settings gt Configure KMail to enter the information needed for sending and receiving messages All configuration options can be ac cessed under Configure KMail wrench icon 12 4 1 Defining Your User Identity KMail allows you to manage several e mail addresses such as your private e mail address and your business address When writing an e mail select one of the identities previously defined To crea
316. ts can now be processed from the clipboard as needed The decryption of clipboard contents is just as easy Simply open the menu on the panel select Decrypt Clipboard and enter the password associated with your private key The decrypted version is now avail able for processing in the clipboard and in the KGpg editor 11 3 2 Encrypting and Decrypting by Dragging and Dropping To encrypt or decrypt files click the icons on the desktop or in the file manager drag them to the padlock in the panel and drop them there If the file is not en crypted KGpg asks for the key to use As soon as you have selected a key the file is encrypted without any further messages In the file manager encrypted files are designated with the suffix asc and the padlock icon These files can be de crypted by clicking the file icon dragging it to the KGpg symbol in the panel SUSE LINUX ______ 129 130 Import Export Key server hkp subkeys pgp net Key to be exported 0x1F47FFAD Tux Pinguin lt tuxGexample com y Export attributes photo id iX un Figure 11 5 Exporting a Key to a Key Server and dropping it there Then select whether the file should be decrypted and saved or displayed in the editor If you select Decrypt and Save KGpg prompts for the password of your private key and saves the decrypted file in the same di rectory as the encrypted file 11 3 3 The KGpg Editor Instead of creating cont
317. ts of an image using the paint tools A good way to use it is to make a rough selection using the intelligent scissors or the lasso freehand selection tool Then activate the quick mask by pressing the small icon with the dashed box in the lower left corner The quick mask displays the selection using an overlay of red Areas shaded with red are not selected Areas appearing as they did before the mask was activated are selected To modify the selection use the paint tools Painting with white se lects the painted pixels Painting with black unselects pixels Shades of gray col ors are treated as shades of gray are a partial selection Partial selection allows smooth transitions between selected and unselected areas 20 5 Editing Images Basics Note To use a different color for displaying the quick mask right click the quick mask button then select Configure Color and Opacity from the menu Click the colored box in the dialog that opens to select a new color Note After using the paint tools to adjust the selection as desired convert from the quick mask view back to the normal selection view by clicking the icon in the lower left corner of the image window currently displaying a red box The se lection is again displayed with the marching ants 20 5 3 Applying and Removing Color Most image editing involves applying or removing color By selecting a part of the image limit where color can be applied or removed
318. u Confirm the changes with OK More complex filters are also possible For example you may want to save only the messages written by Fred Johnson to the KDE user list Here the remaining filter criteria come into play 142 12 10 Filters 1 Click Settings gt Configure Filters and select the newly created filter 2 To filter all messages containing mailto kde userftkde orgin the To or Cc fields and originating from Fred define a second filter under Filter Criteria using the second row of drop down menus Select From in the first menu and contains in the second Then enter Fred s e mail address in the input field Make sure to enable Applies to all 3 Select the action to execute move delete etc You have now created a filter that transfers all mails from Fred Johnson on the KDE user list as specified 12 10 3 Spam Filters While electronic mail has many advantages it also has a significant disadvantage spam Unsolicited mass mailings also known as spam sent by the advertisement industry clog your electronic inbox and cause long transfer times Filtering tools can separate the annoying ballast from important messages SpamAssassin is such a tool that can be embedded into KMail It relies on various built in rules and has the ability to learn from its experience with spam The configuration of this useful application for KMail is described here Preparations
319. udacity less 188 ee 189 la a eh eee eee e 190 15 63 Saving and Exporting ooo o 191 ferius te 191 SUM E Aue Rees eru te Ga Raed 192 15 9 ALSA and MIDI i s 2 goa 2 ale be bum mom ROW ae m Rn 193 159 1 Loading Sound Fonts SB Live and AWE 194 159 2 vkeybd Virtual MIDI Keyboard 195 oid whe 196 SUSE LINUX 15 10 MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card 198 ata 198 T LL 198 199 oe 200 Hired 200 o 200 E 201 AE 202 m 208 ais fe dcus oa Ap SE ded diede 203 205 T 205 207 Dra eee eRe ed do A 208 16 1 1 Video Source and Network Search 208 Oo ee dea dol jes 209 209 rta Bk hy eG eG as aces e de 209 162 Video Text with alevt e e 210 Ed Gia hah be he Ek ae dt dete be ee 210 16 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC 211 DU rienda ear he dada Gas 211 a Go A aa a eA da aa 211 La eee AAA 212 beta a w bee EER Pow eee ee d 213 CE en eee ae ee ed Re ee Be 213 CEMA ERNE Oe ee Oa E 213 xi Contents 17 K3b The KDE Burning Application 215 bow RoR osos wh Oe bee ok Mein does n dete s 216 TCI 217 DTI 218 Vues eV eR IR HEU UP DRE IR eid e iras 219 TIC A A e RS 220 AAA ar aa 220 221 Di dde da cd 222 A ee AA EERTE les 222 NI dte Hagel ois Gh uy MAIER le de enit e Hed wt 222 TITLE 223 OPEP 224 rrr 225 27 Labs dias 228 A amp ae IAE 228 TT 228 19 4 TheMe
320. ugh AIfKF6 The seventh console is reserved for X 21 1 Introduction to Bash In the KDE taskbar there is an icon depicting a monitor with a seashell When you click this icon a console window opens in which to enter commands The console normally runs Bash Bourne again shell a program developed as part of the GNU project It is by far the most widely used derivative of the Bourne shell sh Once you have opened the shell see the prompt on the first line The prompt usually consists of the user name host name and current path but it can be customized When the cursor is behind this prompt you can send commands directly to your computer system 21 1 1 Commands A command consists of several elements The first element is always the actual command followed by parameters or options Commands are executed when you press Enter Before doing so easily edit the command line add options or correct typing errors One of the most frequently used commands is 1s which can be used with or without arguments Entering the plain 1s command in the console shows the contents of the current directory Options are prefixed with a hyphen The command 1s 1 for instance shows the contents of the same directory in full detail Next to each file name see the date when the file was created the file size in bytes and further details which are covered later One very important option that exists for many commands is the help option By enteri
321. uired for the WaveTable synthesis provided the respec tive files were installed from the Creative driver CD using YaST Currently the script only works for one sound card However ALSA can easily manage up to eight sound cards Sound fonts can be loaded with a command like s xload D n usr share sfbank creative 8MBGMSFX SF2 n stands for the number of the sound card 0 1 etc This may not be the number under which the sound card was configured This number is instead determined by the order in which the individual sound drivers are loaded You can also load one of the sound fonts installed in usr share sounds sf2 The sound font Vintage Dreams Waves v2 sf2 by IAN WILSON contains 128 analog synthesizer sounds and eight drum sets It is suitable for SB AWE as well as for SB Live cards The ROM sound font gu11 rom sf2by SAMUEL COLLINS is only suitable for SB AWE cards It provides an extended general MIDI bank for these cards Review the copyright files and the documentation in usr share doc packages snd_sf2 More sound fonts are available at URLs such as http www hammersound net 15 9 ALSA and MIDI Channel EL gt Control ModWheel PEEL Bank all Preset 000 000 Piano 1 000 001 Piano 2 000 002 Piano 3 000 003 Honky Tonk 000 004 E Piano 1 000 005 E Piano 2 000 006 Harpsichord 000 007 Clavinet 000 008 Celesta 000 009 Glockenspiel 127 Key ERES Velocity esee p Pitch Clear E l xnur ui punog
322. ularSynth Synthesizer and Effect Processor analog saw toothed wave generator Mvclpf 3 and Mvclpf 4 are very real istic reproductions of the filter cascade invented by R A Moog These plug ins represent a milestone in the digital reproduction of this legendary low pass filter An effect module frequently featured in a classic modular system is the Bode Fre quency Shifter The plug in of the same name implemented by Steve Harris allows experimenting with frequency shifting 15 11 4 Keeping Track with the Control Center xnu ui PUNOS Select the MIDI channel in the Control Center build connections between the MIDI controllers and the module parameters and create individually operable user interfaces for example for live performances Range limitations for the slid ers can also be set here The list to the left displays the MIDI controllers used in a patch In this tree view the parameters associated with a controller are shown under the respective con troller As soon as a controller event that does not exist in the list is received via MIDI it is added to the list The list to the right shows the modules and their pa rameters If you select a parameter here the respective control appears enabling modification of the parameter and range limits To create a MIDI binding select a controller in the list to the left and a parameter in the list to the right Then click Bind To clear a MIDI binding simply select the
323. uld prefer ably save them in open formats such as those of OpenOffice org to avoid any file conversion problems 3 3 1 From MS Word to OpenOffice org Write When importing Word files into OpenOffice org some of the formatting of the original may be lost For consistent fonts use the SUSE Linux YaST Online Up date to download the Microsoft fonts or install these fonts during the original installation of SUSE Linux Please observe the license conditions for these fonts A very useful feature of OpenOffice org is that you can save all your documents as PDF files To do so select File Export Files composed with OpenOffice org can be saved in the doc format They can then be opened and edited with Microsoft Office on a Windows system Re member to select the correct version of Word when saving so that you can open 3 3 Managing the Transition from Microsoft Office the files with the Microsoft system that you have installed To save a file to such a format select File gt Save As and then choose the desired format If you have problems opening your documents try using the RTF format Be cause this format does not depend on a specific word processor it can be handled both by MS Word and OpenOffice org while still carrying over the formatting information 3 3 2 From MS Excel to OpenOffice org Calc OpenOffice org can save files in recent Microsoft formats down to version MS Office 95 This is not on
324. undFont format Suitable files are available on the Internet fluidsynth has nu merous command line options that can be displayed with fluidsynth h 15 10 2 Configuration of timidity timidity is configured by means of the configuration file usr share timidity timidity cfg View documentation for the configuration with man timidity cfg Also refer to the documentation in usr share doc packages timidity Suitable instrument patches are available at http www stardate bc ca eawpatches html default htm From this URL you can download the file eawpats12_full rar Although the size of this file is 22 MB the download is worthwhile because it equips you with a full set of GM GS and XG instruments To use these patches with timidity proceed as follows First assume the root user identity Then create the directory usr share timidity eawpats copy eawpats12 full rar there and change to this directory The command unrar x eawpats12_full rar decompresses the archive Now edit the file timidity cfg inthe directory usr share timidity lt should only contain the two lines shown in File on the facing page 15 10 MIDI Playback without a WaveTable Card Example 15 2 timidity cfg dir usr share timidity eawpats source timidity cfg eawpats12_full rar also contains a file called timidity cfg which is placed in the directory eawpat s following the decompression The file is in cluded with the source command In this file only th
325. unique file name for every message Messages are stored in directories and can easily be identified and further processed KMail uses the MailDir format as the more convenient alternative by default but MailDir is not supported by many other e mail programs This can be a disadvantage if you sometimes want to use a different e mail program However there is no problem pro cessing old e mails in mbox format when using MailDir Just copy or move the mbox file into a MailDir folder 12 3 Access Types KMail allows you to access your electronic mail in various ways The access type largely depends on your Internet service provider ISP or mail server The most important access types are POP3 IMAP and dIMAP POP3 Post Office Protocol POP3 post office protocol version 3 is a standard ized method protocol for the delivery of e mail A POP3 server stores the messages until the user retrieves them with a POP3 client in this case KMail The user may or may not be asked to authenticate with a name and a password The drawback of this protocol is that it transmits passwords as plain text To remedy this alternative protocols have been developed namely APOP and KPOP These transmit passwords in encrypted form Most ISPs use POP3 For a more detailed explanation of the protocol see http en wikipedia org wiki Post_Office_Protocol 12 1 KMail and Kontact IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol Unlike a POP3 server an IMAP mail server s
326. ure for viewing recent editing steps and undoing them by clicking the respective item in the list Use Discard with caution because it deletes editing steps from the list Subsequently these steps can no longer be un done Cursor 587 Hz D4 10dB Peak 623 Hz D 4 Spectrum zi 1024 zi Export Hanning window zi Log frequency zi Close Figure 15 9 The Spectrum 190 156 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity The built in spectrum analyzer assists in quickly tracking down any noises View the spectrum of the selected segment with View gt Plot Spectrum Select a log arithmic frequency scale in octaves with Log frequency If you move the mouse pointer within the spectrum the frequencies of the peaks are automatically dis played together with the respective notes Unwanted frequencies are best removed with Effect gt FFT Filter In connec tion with the filtering process it may be necessary to readjust the signal ampli tude with Amplify Additionally Amplify can be used to check the amplitude By default the New Peak Amplitude is set to 0 0 dB This value represents the highest possible amplitude in the selected audio format Amplification shows the value needed to amplify the selected segment to this peak amplitude A nega tive value indicates overamplification 15 6 3 Saving and Exporting To save the entire project select File gt Save Project or
327. use the drop down box to select the image to which the tabs refer By clicking Auto control whether the active image is chosen automatically By default Auto is enabled Layers shows the different layers in the current images and can be used to ma nipulate the layers Information is available in Layers on page Channels shows and can manipulate the color channels of the image Paths are an advanced method of selecting parts of an image They can also be used for drawing Paths shows the paths available for an image and provides access to path functions Undo shows a limited history of modifications made to the current image Its use is described in Undoing Mistakes on page The bottom portion of the window contains three tabs With them select the cur rent brush gradient and pattern 20 3 Getting Started in GIMP 20 3 1 Creating a New Image To create a new image select File New or press Cirl N This opens a dia log in which to make settings for the new image If desired use From Template to select a template on which to base the new image The GIMP includes a num ber of templates ranging from an A4 sheet of paper to a CD cover from which to choose To create a custom template select File gt Dialogs gt Templates and use the controls offered by the window that opens In the Image Size section set the size of the image to create in pixels or anoth
328. ut File tmp take01 wav Time 0 00 00 R Capture L R l Record Pause Stop Buffer Peak Figure 15 10 QARecord A Simple Hard Disk Recording Application 15 8 Compressing Audio Data Uncompressed audio data in CD quality consumes almost ten MB per minute The MP3 procedure was developed by Fraunhofer IIS for the purpose of dras tically compressing this data Unfortunately this procedure is patented There fore companies that distribute MP3 encoders are required to pay license fees The powerful MP3 encoder Lame was developed for Linux Although the source code of Lame is under the GPL SUSE is not allowed to include this encoder in our distribution For more information about the legal situation visit the project web page at http lame sourceforge net In some countries including Germany and the USA the use of Lame is permitted for research purposes only Ogg Vorbis package name vorbis tools isa free audio compression for mat that is now supported by the majority of audio players The web page of the project is http www xiph org ogg vorbis The vorbis tools package in cludes an encoder and a simple player The encoder is started from the command line with oggenc The only parameter needed is the WAV file to compress The option h displays an overview of the other parameters The latest version of the Ogg encoder even supports encoding with a variable bit rate In this way an even higher degree of
329. ut Manuela Piotrowski Thomas Schraitle Setting DocBook XML ETEX This book has been printed on 100 chlorine free bleached paper Contents I Configuration 1 The KDE Desktop 11 Desktop Components sas s daai llle TP Was artic duod Dd ete SN ieee Aue 1213 CD ROM DVD ROM and Floppy Disks 114 ThePrinterlcon lll 1 15 ThePanel isir ee ama RR RR ss aia EXE IPAEESSCRUCDD CIT I2 Peripherals soria RE rta EES SER A 12 2 Desktop s ss Lue ed dh dE epo ie eed 123 Sound amp Multimedia llle 124 Appearane e nA 125 Regional amp Accessibility lt 13 Konqueror as a File Manager 13 1 The Konqueror Menu 132 TheToolbar 13 3 The Location Bar 13 4 The Main Window 14 Important Utilities a 24 T OT 24 142 Klnternet Connecting to the Internet 24 143 The Download Manager KGet 26 144 SuSEWatcher lee 27 145 TheClippoardKlipperl llle 27 m 28 1 4 7 Formatting Floppy Disks with KFloppy 30 30 149 DesktopSharing cn 66 m a we were A pe 32 14 10 Screenshots with KSnapshot o o ooo o 33 1411 The Information Manager Kontact 34 Db ee E so 35 14 13 Font Administration with KFontinst 38 2 The GNOME Desktop 41 21 The Desktop eroa da o cn meen ee RE a ee 42 211 Thelcons
330. ver in Display Modes The Ad vanced tab contains a few special options that normally do not need to be modi fied SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 45 46 Select the screen saver mode under the Display Modes tab Choose from Ran dom Screen Saver random selection of screen savers from a custom defined list Only One Screen Saver Blank Screen Only or Disable Screen Saver Select one or more screensavers from the list for the operating modes Only One Screen Saver or Random Screen Saver The currently selected screensaver is dis played in the small preview window The Preview button launches a fullscreen preview of that screensaver which can be aborted by pressing any key Select the previous or following screensaver for preview by clicking the corresponding tri angles below the selection list In the last step determine after how long the screen should be made completely black Blank After the screensaver module should be changed Cycle After or the screen should be locked Lock Screen After All time references are given in minutes 2 2 5 Windows This module controls the behavior of application windows Determine how the window should react to contact with the mouse pointer or to double clicks on its title and define the key to hold for moving an application window When several application windows populate the desktop the active one by de fault is the
331. ver the mouse pointer when moving it a small distance but you can still cover a large distance on the screen with a flick of the wrist Double Click Interval Here set the maximum interval between two mouse clicks that should still be interpreted as a double click Drag Start Time An object selected with a click is moved only if you continue to move the pointer for the specified period in milliseconds Drag Start Distance An object selected with a click is moved only if you drag it the minimum distance specified in pixels Mouse Wheel Scrolls By If you have a wheel mouse specify the number of lines the selected element should scroll with each wheel notch To be able to navigate the mouse pointer with the arrow keys of the number pad activate this function under Mouse Navigation and customize the parameters according to your needs Printers The printer administration module mainly consists of three parts The top frame lists all printers available in the network The center part features a configuration and information zone comprising four tabs The lower part indicates the current print system type The following description only covers the configuration part P Note The configuration options relevant for your daily work with the sys tem can be accessed under Jobs and Instances Information and Properties mainly provide information or are used for system admin istration Note zi 1 2 Set
332. which fonts are currently available type the URL onts into the ad dress field of a Konqueror session This displays two windows Personal and System User installed fonts are installed to the folder Personal Only root can install to the System folder To install fonts as a user follow these steps 1 Start the Control Center and access the appropriate module with System Administration gt Font Installation 2 Choose Add Fonts from the icon bar or from the menu available when right clicking the list 3 In the dialog that opens select one or more fonts for installation 1 4 Important Utilities 4 The marked fonts are then installed to your personal font folder Selecting a font shows a preview To update system fonts first select System administration mode and enter your root password then proceed as described for user font installation The feature for deactivating installed fonts is very useful They are not removed but are made unavailable to the system Select the deactivate icon or its counter part from the context menu This makes the green checkmark disappear The new settings become active after confirmation with Apply The deactivated fonts are then no longer available to applications This reduces the size of font lists dis played in applications SUSE LINUX doptseq Jay eut 39 The GNOME Desktop GNOME GNU Network Object Model Environment is a fast Linux desktop The aim
333. x glare on the screen 22 1 4 Optimum Climate The room climate determines our well being to a great extent Problems arise more often if itis too cold too warm too drafty or too dry Low relative humidity can lead to burning eyes dry mucous membranes skin irritations and increased susceptibility to colds Things get complicated when people who work in the same room are accustomed to different base temperatures For your well being itis important to observe the recommended basic values for temperature and hu midity and to avoid strong air movement The working material itself should not contribute to the increase of temperature For activities in a sitting position or simple work a room temperature of 20 to 22 C is recommended In summer the temperature should be 26 C at the most This value should only be exceeded for a short time when the outdoor temperature is higher A lot of equipment as well as people emit heat and influence room air con ditions This should be reduced as much as possible The air humidity should be between 40 sometimes 50 and 65 percent and should be checked This value is especially affected by heating systems SUSE LINUX 92DJ O 10M SUI ui SOILIOUOBIJ 285 Draft possibly from open windows and doors or air conditioning should not exceed 0 1 to 0 15 m s Draft on individual parts of the body should be avoided a An air conditioner should be individually adjustable It should be serviced
334. y of the document The up and the down arrows to its right set the zoom levels in intervals of ten Enter Internet addresses URLs in the following entry box The GNOME foot shows Galeon s progress If the icon is animated Galeon is working and transferring data 9 1 Optimized for the Web Galeon is primarily designed to make surfing the Internet as convenient as possi ble In the default configuration Galeon presents a second toolbar enabling quick access to the popular Google search engine and its news and image search func tion It can also offer access to an online dictionary and use the bookmarklets This is made possible by small JavaScript functions built into Galeon for example 9 Optimized for the Web find out how current a page is or allow the Internet site to slowly scroll down the screen 9 2 Efficient Surfing with Tabs Galeon can display multiple documents in a single application window To open a link in a web site in the form of a new tab right click that link Select Open in new tab in the pop up menu Create a fresh Galeon tab by clicking File Open New Tab Click the tabs to switch the display 9 3 Smart Bookmarks Smart bookmarks give access to a site s functions along with its address for ex ample searching the Internet for terms with Google Enter the word in the input field after the Google icon The result is displayed after a few seconds To activate or create additional smart bookmarks s
335. ymbols to the icon The Permissions tab provides access to the access read and write permission settings for this file for the user the group or others The Notes tab offers the management of comments The menu for the trash can addi tionally features the Empty Trashcan option This deletes its contents To remove an icon from the desktop simply move it into the trash can However be careful with this option if you throw folder icons or file icons into the trash can the actual data is deleted If the icons only represent links to a file or to a di rectory only the links are deleted To create a link on the desktop to a folder or a file access the object in question with Nautilus Right click the object and select Make Link Drag the link from the Nautilus window and drop it on the desktop 2 1 2 The Desktop Menu Right clicking a free spot on the desktop displays a menu with various options Select New Folder to create a new folder Create a launcher icon for an applica tion with New Launcher Provide the name of the application and the command for starting it then choose an icon to represent it It is also possible to change the desktop background or to reset it to its default setting 2 1 The Desktop 2 1 3 The Panel The panel contains the window icons of all started applications in the taskbar If you click the name of a window in the taskbar it is moved to the foreground If the progr
336. z 3 a El amp Figure 1 10 Kontact that correspond to them Therefore if you are unsure about specific settings con sult the manuals of those separate programs Configure General View lets you decide how components should display their information in the general view star icon For instance you can config ure the KDE address book component to display all birthdays or anniversaries or decide which directories should be listed in the summary 1 4 12 Chatting With Friends Kopete Kopete is an online messenger application allowing multiple partners connected to the Internet to chat with each other Kopete currently supports all common messenger protocols such as ICO MSN Yahoo SMS Jabber and IRC Configuring Kopete Configure Kopete by entering your personal user data Click Settings gt Con figure Kopete Connections shows all currently available protocols Check the desired connection type to activate it With Accounts enter your user data You must register with a provider offer ing instant messaging services before using such service Click New to open a configuration assistant that can assist you in completing your user profile SUSE LINUX _______ 35 36 The next step lists the avilable messaging services Select the service with which you have registered and click Continue In the next step enter the user data re ceived upon registration with the messaging service Th

Novell Suse Linux Professional 9.2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents